Home

BMW X1 Owner's Manual

1. 4 amp Climate O Activate parked car vent O Activate Timer 1 Timer 1 O Activate Timer 2 Timer 2 38 The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on Preselecting activation times 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Activate Timer 1 or Activate Timer 2 A Timer 1 or Timer 2 Wa esr LY Activate parkea car ven O Activate Timer 1 Timer 1 J OU Activate Ti Mer 2 re Timer 5 Set the desired time 38 The symbol on the automatic climate con trol lights up when the switch on time is acti vated 6 The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours After that it needs to reacti vated 114 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Interior equipment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Universal garage door opener The concept The universal garage door opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in re
2. If the e mail addresses are stored in the con tacts the contact is displayed Select the con tact to display details If the e mail addresses are not stored in the contacts only the e mail address is displayed Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 216 Deactivating the full display When an e mail is opened in the vehicle the e mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle This may result in charges 1 Office 2 Messages 214 3 Open Options 4 Fully download e mails Only a part of the e mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle Reading the e mail out loud Read the e mail out loud refer to page 216 Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed 1 Office 2 Calendar The appointments on the current day are displayed Selecting the calendar day 1 Select the date amp Calendar Thursday 09 00 10 30 03 07 Team Meeting Office 2 Select the desired day or date gt Next day gt Date gt Previous day gt Today Display the appointment 1 Select the desired appointment 2 Scroll through the appointment if neces Sary gt Turn the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Office Communication gt 0 LB Select the symbol Using contact data C
3. Random Fast forward reverse gt Press and hold the button Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions such as very high tem peratures refer to the audio device operating instructions Depending on the configuration of the audio files e g bit rates greater than 256 kbit s the files may not play back correctly in each case Information on connection gt The connected audio device is supplied with a max power of 500 mA if supported by the device Therefore do not addition ally connect the device to a socket in the vehicle otherwise playback may be com promised gt Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface gt Do not connect USB hard drives Do not use the USB audio interface to re charge external devices Bluetooth audio Ata glance gt Music files on external devices such as au dio devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia V V Use of a mobile phone as an audio source refer to page 200 Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers The volume of the sound output is de pendent on the device If necessary adjust the volume on the device Up to four external d
4. gt LED goes out the Auto Start Stop function is activated Automatic deactivation In certain situations the Auto Start Stop func tion is deactivated automatically in the interest of safety for example if the driver s absence is detected Malfunction The indicator lamp lights up The au tomatic engine start stop function no longer switches of the engine auto matically A message appears on the Control Display It is possible to continue driving Have the system checked Parking brake The concept The parking brake is primarily intended to pre vent the vehicle from rolling while parked it brakes the rear wheels Indicator lamp The indicator lamp lights up and an acoustic signal sounds when driving away The parking brake is still set Setting The lever engages automatically Releasing Pull up slightly press the button and lower the lever Notes Using the parking brake while driving If it should become necessary to use the parking brake while driving do not pull the parking brake too forcefully Keep the button on the parking brake lever pressed at all times Excessive application of the parking brake can block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of the vehicle lt 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action lightly apply the parking brake from time to time when coasting traffic conditio
5. 4 Lamps Front fog lamps Parking lights 5 Steering column stalk left Low beams OR UO 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance Turn signal 64 Change the radio station Select a music track High beams head Scroll through the redial list light flasher 87 ae Vv High beam Assistant 87 Next entertainment source Tm G Roadside parking lights 87 Recirculated air mode 112 Od a Computer 75 Start stop the engine and switch the ignition on off 59 WW Ww ap d 2 Q EE Settings and information about the vehicle 76 11 Steering column stalk right o Windshield wipers 64 Instrument lighting 89 Qe Rainsensor 65 6 Steering wheel buttons left Telephone 198 Rear window wiper 66 B 88 Volume EN 12 Ignition lock 59 13 Steering wheel heating 53 Activate deactivate the voice acti vation system 27 14 Horn the entire surface 15 Adjust the steering wheel 53 16 Cruise control 103 7 Shift paddles 69 8 Instrument cluster 16 9 Steering wheel buttons right 3 17 Opening tailgate 38 18 Releasing the hood 243 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance Eells Cockpit Instrument cluster A WON yet oo 80 gt 100 2 120 140 60 p 180 120 2007 220 140 240 teh yy yaks 160 1 1 1 2 lt i rh Speedometer Indicator wa
6. Do not place objects on the covers Do not place objects on the cover if you do so they may pose a danger to vehicle occu pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or damage the cover lt To load bulky luggage the covers can be re moved Remove the cover or cigarette lighter gt Rear cover ear center console 1 Detach the securing straps from the tail gate 2 Lift the cover slightly arrow 1 and pull it back and out of the brackets arrows 2 oh es 5 ee eer B Remove the cover or cigarette lighter In storage compartment under center armrest To access the socket remove the cover Front cover 1 Push the cover up and out of the brackets In cargo area on both sides arrow 1 ra Fold open the cover 2 Pull the cover back up and out of the lat eral brackets on both sides arrow 2 120 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Enlarging the cargo area General information The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40 20 40 The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different positions between the comfort and transport positions and they can be folded down In the comfort position the backrests are tilted back to the greatest possible angle and in the transport position they are nearly vertical Before mounting a child restraint fixing sys
7. Information on suitable mobile phones refer to page 198 The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected gt Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive gt Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat the pairing proce dure gt Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the mobile phone or vehicle De lete connections with other devices if nec essary gt Is the audio connection activated Deacti vate the audio connection gt Is the mobile phone in power save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life Charge the mobile phone in the snap in adapter or via the charging cable gt Depending on the mobile phone it is pos sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle Unpair the con nected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone The mobile phone no longer reacts 201 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone gt Switch the mobile phone off and on again gt Is the ambient temperature too high or low Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions The telephone functions are not available gt Is the mobile phone paired as an a
8. Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Maintenance Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els These entries are proof of regular mainte nance Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may only be used by the service center by work shops that operate according to the specifica tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro priately trained personnel and by other authorized persons Otherwise its use may lead to vehicle malfunctions On the driver s side is an OBD socket for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions 248 Emissions seruce gt The warning light lights up ENGINE a ss a SOON Emissions are deteriorating Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible gt The warning light flashes under certain cir cumstances This indicates that there is excessive mis firin
9. RGus Short commands for voice activation system Open the manual search gt Manuak Select a frequency range gt Select frequency Open a station gt Select station AM Open a frequency Frequency Kilohertz e g fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz Open the AM stations A Me Open the manual search Manuak Satellite radio Open the satellite radio gt Satellite radio lt Switch on the satellite radio gt Satellite radio on Select a satellite radio channel gt Select satellite radiox e g satellite radio channel 2 Stored stations Open the stored stations Presets Choose a stored station gt Select preset Select a stored station Preset lt e g stored station 2 276 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Short commands for voice activation system BRG KiKa CD multimedia CD DVD drive Select a track Play back a CD Select a CD Select a CD and track Open the CD and Multimedia menu CD and DVD Select a DVD Display the entertainment details on a split screen gt Track e g track 5 or gt C D track e g CD track 5 gt C D on gt Select C D gt C D track lt e g CD 3 track 5 gt C D and multimedia gt C Dk gt D V D e g DVD 3 Entertainment details Music collection Search for music open a menu Open the current playback Open the music collection Play back the music collection
10. 154 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation Destination guidance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Starting destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Make a destination entry refer to page 146 3 Accept destination 4 Start guidance The route is shown on the Control Display The distance to the destination intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view Terminating destination guidance Navigation Map Guidance Stop guidance SSS Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip destination guidance can be resumed Resume guidance Route criteria General information gt The route calculated can be influenced by selecting certain criteria gt The route criteria can be changed when the destination is entered and during desti nation guidance gt Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when planning a route e g a
11. 2 DV DVD menu The DVD menu is displayed The display depends on the contents of the DVD 3 Toselect menu items move the controller and press it To change to the video menu turn the control ler and press it DVD settings For some DVDs settings can only be made via the DVD menu refer also to the information on the DVD Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Audio language Options Switch off control display DVD video Audio langquage Subtitles Display settings Additional options CD Multimedia 4 Select the desired language Selecting the subtitles The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Subtitles 4 Select the desired language or Do not display subtitles I G Subtitles ie Do not display subtitles German English Setting the brightness contrast and color 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Display settings 4 Brightness Contrast or Color 6 Brightness Contrast i Color 5 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052
12. Different variants of TeleService may be imple mented in the vehicle The following condi tions must always be met gt Wireless reception is available gt The ignition is switched on gt A current ConnectedDrive subscription or a vehicle equipped with intelligent Emer gency Request Concierge service General information The Concierge service offers information on events gas stations and hotels and provides phone numbers and addresses Hotels can be booked directly using the Concierge service The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan Starting the Concierge service 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Concierge i ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request 3 Start service A voice connection is established with the Concierge service Phone numbers and ad dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle Messages Information on messages refer to page 212 Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via a Check Control message refer to page 82 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication onnectedDriv Starting Roadside Assistance without TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Roadside Assistance
13. Navigation 2 Map 3 AX Traffic Info 4 Detour information 5 Detour Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions gt The system does not point out traffic ob structions along the original route gt Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on the map gt Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction gt Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting 162 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 What to do if Navigation What to do if gt The current transmission position cannot be displayed The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region is in a poor reception area or the system is currently determining the posi tion Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky gt The destination without street information is not used for route guidance When city has been input no downtown can be determined Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid ance gt The destination is not used for route guid ance The destination data is not contained in the navigation data Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original gt Letters for destination input cannot be se lected The stored data do not contain the data of the destination
14. No chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically this can destroy the webbing lt Use only a mild soapy solution with the safety belts clipped into their buckles Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats carpets and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals otherwise the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects 265 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Care Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed such as for cleaning lt Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning When returning the floor mats secure them again to prevent slipping If the floor carpets are very dirty clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner To prevent matting of the carpet rub back and forth in the direction of travel only Sensors cameras To clean sensors or cameras use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner Displays screens Clean the displays with an anti static micro fiber cloth Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleansers Keep all fluids and mo
15. Parts and accessories For your own safety it is recommended that you use genuine parts and accessories ap proved by BMW When you purchase accesso ries tested and approved by BMW and Genu ine BMW Parts you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum perform ance when installed on your vehicle BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship BMW will not ac cept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not ap proved by BMW BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle its operation or its occupants Genuine BMW Parts BMW Acces sories and other products approved by BMW together with professional advice on using these items are available from all BMW cen ters Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms radios amplifiers radar detectors wheels suspension components brake dust shields telephones including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna or transceiver equipment for instance CBs walkie talkies ham radios or similar accessories may cause extensive dam age to the vehicle compromise its safety in terfere with the vehicle s electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited War ranty See you
16. Power windows opening and closing 43 Power windows refer to Win dows 42 Power windows safety switch 43 Prescribed engine oils refer to Approved engine oils 245 Pressure tires 232 Pressure warning tires 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Profile depth refer to Mini mum tread depth 239 Profile tires 238 Programmable memory but tons iDrive 24 Protection function refer to Pinch protection panoramic glass sunroof 45 Protective function refer to Pinch protection system windows 43 Push and turn switch refer to Controller 21 R Radiator fluid refer to Cool ant 246 Radio operated key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Radio ready state 59 Radio ready state switched off 60 Radio ready state switched on 59 Radio setting refer to Radio ready state 59 Rain sensor 65 Random 177 Random playback 177 Range 75 RDS 169 Reading lights 89 Reading out loud 216 Rear lights refer to Tail lights 253 Rear luggage rack 138 Rear seat backrest folda ble 121 Rear seats adjusting the backrest tilt 121 Rear seats adjusting the head restraints 50 Rear seats folding down 121 Rear seats folding down the backrests 121 Rear socket 120 Rearview camera clean ing 109 Rearview mirror refer to Mir rors 51 Rear window defroster 113 Rear window washing 66 Rear window wiper 66 Recirculated air mode 112
17. Symbols No service is currently re quired The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally man dated inspection is approach ing The service deadline has al ready passed Entering dates Enter the dates for the required inspections Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly refer to page 78 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Go Service required 4 8 Vehicle inspection EF Service required ok Engine oil ok Front brake pads OK Rear brake pads Brake fluid oK Vehicle check OK Vehicle inspection 5 Open the menu for entering the deadline 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays 6 Date 7 Create the settings Press the controller to apply the setting The year is highlighted 9 Turn the controller to make the adjust ment 10 Press the controller to apply the setting The date entry is stored To exit from the menu Move the controller to the left Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or le gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service cen ter before a service due date You can check when your service center was notified 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the s
18. Tires minimum tread 239 Tires retreaded tires 240 Tires run flat tires 241 Tires storage 241 Tire tread 238 Toll roads route 155 Tone 166 Tool kit refer to Onboard ve hicle tool kit 249 Tools refer to Onboard vehi cle tool kit 249 Tow bar 261 Tow fitting 261 Towing 259 Towing with automatic trans mission 260 Town city navigation 147 Tow rope 261 Tow starting 262 291 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 95 Traction control 100 Traffic bulletins naviga tion 159 Transmission automatic transmission with Step tronic 67 70 Transmission lock refer to Changing the selector lever positions 68 Transmission lock refer to P Park 68 Transmission overriding se lector lever lock in case of automatic transmission with Steptronic 69 Transmission positions auto matic transmission with Steptronic 70 Transporting children safely 54 Treble tone 166 Trip computer refer to Dis plays on the Control Dis play 76 Trip distance counter refer to Trip odometer 73 Triple turn signal activa tion 64 Trip odometer 73 Trips planning 153 Trunk refer to Cargo area 120 Turning circle refer to Dimen sions 270 Turning lamps refer to Adap tive Light Control 86 Turn signal bulb replace ment 253 Turn signal indicator warning lamp 16 Turn signals 64 Turn signals bulb replace ment front 253
19. gt Fader front rear volume distribution Setting treble bass balance and fader 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone Satellite radio Presets Tone 166 3 Select the desired tone settings t Tone Treble Bass uin Balance L i Fader M Equalizer LY Surround Volume settings iE LJ 4 To adjust turn the controller 5 To store press the controller Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges Adjusting the equalizer 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Equalizer 4 Select the desired setting GF Equalizer 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 KHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Tone Entertainment Multi channel playback surround Choose between stereo and multi channel playback surround Setting multi channel playback surround 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Surround 1 V s Tone Treble Bass Balance Fader Equalizer G Surround Volume settings When surround is activated multi channel playback is simulated when a stereo audio track is played Volume gt Speed volume soeed dependent vol ume control gt PDC volume of the PDC signal com pared to the entertainment sound output gt Gong volume of the signal such as the safety belt reminder compared
20. lamps increases for example if water droplets form have them checked by your service cen ter Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Replacing components Mobility Headlight setting Changing the bulbs and lights may influence the headlight settings Have the headlight set ting checked by a service center and corrected if necessary after changing bulbs or lights Removing the headlight cover The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the engine compartment and the low beam and turn signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding cover in the wheel arch amp 1 High beam cover COE m ASN 2 Low beam cover 3 Turn signal bulb socket To remove the covers gt High beams fold out the bracket arrow 4 and take the cover out of the guide gt Low beams unscrew the cover arrow 5 Attach the covers carefully When attaching the covers proceed carefully otherwise leaks may occur causing damage to the headlamp system lt Proceed in reverse order when attaching the covers Access via the wheel arch For low beams and turn signals only 1 Turn the wheel inward 2 Open the folding cover in the wheel arch To open the locks turn them counter clockwise all the way using a coin for ex ample Halogen headlights At a glance High beams headlight flasher Parking lights Low beams mh O N Turn signal Low beams and high beams Wear protective goggles and glove
21. tailgate m Nn gt Press the button next to the tailgate Before closing the tailgate ensure that the cargo area floor panel is not raised refer to page 123 38 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the tailgate is clear otherwise injuries or damage may result Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control All you need to do is to have the remote con trol with you e g in your jacket pocket The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment Comfort Access supports the following func tions gt Unlocking locking of the vehicle Unlocking of the tailgate separately Starting the engine VV y Convenient closing Functional requirement gt To lock the vehicle the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle gt The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started if the re mote control is inside the vehicle Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access Unlocking Grasp the handle on the driver s or front pas senger door completely arrow 1 This corresponds to pressing the button Locking Touch the area
22. 10 Select the symbol 11 Start guidance or Add as another destination 150 Add a destination as a further destination refer to page 153 Start search if a search term is not entered the search is repeated with the previous search term Category search 1 Category search 2 Town City 3 Select or enter the town city 4 Category 5 Select the category 6 Category details For some Points of Interest multiple cate gory details can be selected Move the controller to the left to leave the category details 7 Start search A list of the Points of Interest is displayed 8 Select a special destination Details are displayed If multiple details are stored you can leaf through the pages If a phone number is available a connec tion can be established if necessary 9 Select the symbol 10 Start guidance or Add as another destination Add a destination as a further destination refer to page 153 Display of Points of Interest List of Points of Interest Points of Interest are arranged by distance and appear with a direc tional arrow pointing to the special destination In the splitscreen Points of Interest of the se lected category are displayed in the map view as symbols The display depends on the scale of the map and the category Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Destination entry via the Concierge service
23. 2 External temperature display and clock 3 Odometer and trip odometer Knob in the instrument cluster Press the knob gt When the ignition is switched on the trip odometer is reset gt When the ignition is switched off the time external temperature and odometer are displayed Units of measure To set the respective units of measure miles or km for the odometer and C or F for the ex ternal temperature refer to page 77 The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Time external temperature display Set the time refer to page 77 External temperature warning If the display drops to 37 F 3 C a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up There is the increased danger of ice Ice on roads Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 C there can be a risk of ice on roads Therefore drive carefully on bridges and shady roads for example to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident lt Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer With the ignition switched on press button 1 in the instrument cluster When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time external tem perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni tion lock Press button 1 in the instrument cluster 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays Tachometer Engine oil temperature Never force the engin
24. A connection is established to the Concierge service refer to page 221 1 Navigation 2 Enter address 3 Open Options 4 BMW Assist dest entry Displaying Points of Interest in the map To display symbols of the Points of Interest in the map view 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Open Options 4 Display Points of Interest 5 Select the setting Destination entry by map Selecting the destination 1 Navigation 2 Map The current position of the vehicle is dis played on the map 3 Interactive map 4 Select the destination with crosshairs gt To change the scale turn the control ler gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt To shift the map diagonally move the controller in the required direction and turn it Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street one of the following pieces of information is displayed gt Astreet name in the vicinity gt The county gt The coordinates of the destination Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed Cy Selected position 48 08 10 O 11 34 36 N Exit interactive map T View in northern direction Display destination Display current location Find points of interest gt Select the symbol Start guidance or Add as another destination Add a destination as a further des
25. Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running The average consumption is computed based on the distance traveled since the last time the computer was reset You can have the average consumption for an other trip displayed refer to Displays on the Control Display below To reset the average consumption press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap prox 2 seconds Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally friendly man ner 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays Displays on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display 1 Vehicle Info 2 Onboard info or Trip computer VS Vehicle Info Onboard info v Trip computer Vehicle status ECO PRO Tips 450 km 230 km To dest 02 15 Arrival 10 5 1 100 km Cons 75 0 km h Speed Range gt Range gt Distance to destination gt Estimated time of arrival if a destination was entered in the navigation system refer to page 146 Displays on the Trip computer amp Trip computer 09 30 01 20 hr 4 140 km Distance W 10 5 1 100 km Cons Speed Depart Duration 4 095 5 km h Reset gt Departure time gt Trip duration 76 gt Trip distance Both displays show gt Average fuel cons
26. Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at the time that the vehicle was manufactured After installing a child seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Operational readiness of airbag system bX When the ignition is switched on refer to page 60 the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational Airbag system malfunction gt The warning lamp does not light up after the ignition is switched on gt Warning light remains permanently on Have the airbag system checked without delay if there is a malfunction In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys tem have it checked without delay otherwise there is the risk that the system will not func tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs lt FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving In the event of a pressure loss the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change This is detected and reported as a flat tire Safety Functional requirements The sy
27. Glove compartment light Ing 125 GPS navigation refer to Navi gation system 144 Gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 270 H Halogen headlamps bulb re placement 251 Handbrake refer to Parking brake 63 Hand held transmitter alter nating code 116 Hands free microphone 18 Hazard warning system 257 HDC Hill Descent Con trol 101 HD Radio 169 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control refer to Parking lamps low beams 85 Headlamp flasher 64 Headlamps bulb replace ment 251 Headlamps care 264 Headlamps cleaning 66 Headlight control auto matic 86 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture 86 Headlight cover remov ing 251 Headlight flasher indicator lamp 17 Headlights 85 Headlights cleaning washer fluid 67 Headliner 19 Head restraints 49 Head restraints adjusting the height 49 Head restraints removing 50 Heatable mirrors 52 Heatable rear window 113 Heatable seats 48 Heating mirrors 52 Heating seats 48 Heavy cargo refer to Stowing cargo 137 Height adjustment seats 46 Height refer to Dimen sions 270 High beam Assistant 87 High beams 87 High beams low beams auto matic refer to High beam Assistant 87 High beams bulb replace ment 251 High beams indicator lamp 17 High pressure washers 263 Hill Descent Control HDC 101 Hill drive off assistant refer to Drive off assistant 102 Hills 134 Holder for beverages 127 Holder for remote control re fer to Ignition lo
28. II 15 Driving Controls Press button P Sport program and manual mode M S Activating the Sport program Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D The Sport program is activated and DS is dis played in the instrument cluster This position is recommended for a perform ance oriented driving style Activating manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D Push the selector lever forward or backward Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g M1 gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward gt To shift up press the selector lever back ward The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate If the engine speed is too high the transmission does not shift down The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument panel followed by the current gear Ending the Sport program manual mode Push the selector lever to the right D is displayed in the instrument cluster Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly change gears since both hands can re main on the steering wheel gt Ifthe shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears while in automatic mode D the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode V If the
29. II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia 3 Additional options 4 Zoom mode Options O zoom mode Select title Viewing angle Main menu Back Selecting a track DVD video 1 Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed Open Options Additional options Select title Select the desired track a 2 Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track 1 Turn the controller during playback Open Options Additional options Viewing angle a ee oS Select the desired camera angle Opening the main menu back These functions are not contained on every DVD Therefore they may not be available for use 180 Notes CD DVD player Do not remove the cover BMW CD DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products Do not operate if the cover is damaged otherwise severe eye damage can result lt CDs and DVDs Use of CDs DVDs gt Do not use self recorded CDs DVDs with labels applied as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrep arable damage to the device gt Only use round CDs DVDs with a standard diameter of 4 7 in 12 cm and do not play CDs DVDs with an adapter e g single CDs otherwise the CDs or the adapter may Jam and no longer eject gt Do not use combined CDs DVDs e g DVD Plus as the CDs DVDs can jam and will no longer
30. Mobile or Other Complete the entries if necessary 7 Store contact Hands free system General information Calls that are being made on the hands free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa From the mobile phone to the hands free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands free system with the ignition switched on Depending on the mobile phone the system automatically switches to the hands free sys tem If the system does not switch over automati cally follow the instructions on the mobile phone display refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions From the hands free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone this depends on the mobile phone Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display refer also to the mobile phone operat ing instructions Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Telephone Communication Snap in adapter 3 Toremove the snap in adapter press but ton 1 General information More information on compatible snap in adapters that support the functions of the mo bile phone is available at the service center Notes 7 At high temperatures the charging function of A the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed When using the mobile phone via the vehicle i na
31. Open Options a a SS Delete folder or Delete track Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options ee ee prs Free memory Music collection Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored ona USB device Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device Depending on the number of tracks backing up the music collection may take several 185 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia hours Therefore it is best to perform the backup during a long trip rA Starting the engine Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment refer to page 125 CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options Music data import export Options Free memory Delete music collection CD Multimedia O Random Music data import export import export USB Import music USB Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device the exist ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced ee LS CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options Music data import export Restore music from USB 186 Deleting the music collection 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Open Options 4 D
32. Play back the most frequently played tracks Music search Current playback Music collection gt Music collection on gt Top fifty External devices Open the external devices Open the Bluetooth devices External devices Bluetooth 277 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 RGus Short commands for voice activation system Tone Open the tone settings Tone Telephone Dial a phone number Open the Telephone menu Display the phone book Redialing Display received calls List of messages Open the Bluetooth devices Dial number gt Telephone Phonebook Rediak Received calls gt Vessages Bluetooth Office Open the Office menu Display Office Today Display the contacts Display the messages Display the calendar Display the tasks Display the reminders Offices Current office lt gt Contacts Messages Calendar Tasks Reminders 278 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Short commands for voice activation system BRG ___ Short commands for voice activation system RESIE Contacts Select a name gt Choose namex My contacts gt My contacts Open the contacts gt Contacts New contact New contact ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist Open BMW Assist gt B M W Assist Open ConnectedDrive gt Connected Drives Open BMW Online gt B M W Online
33. Playback General information gt The display of music track information de pends on the device gt Operation can takes place on the device or iDrive gt Playback is interrupted when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth Starting playback 1 Connect the device 2 CD Multimedia 3 External devices 191 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia 4 Select the symbol GF External devices t JUKEBOX lt Handy ax Vv Gerat r f AUX front He ie ug 5 Select the desired track from the list if necessary Playback menu Depending on the particular device some of the functions may not be available gt Next track Fast forward press and hold the symbol KI Previous music track Reverse press and hold the symbol Disconnecting the audio connection CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio Highlight the desired device Open Options Configure phone Audio OK P a r Unpairing a device 1 CD Multimedia 2 Bluetooth audio 3 If necessary Bluetooth audio 4 Highlight the device that is to be unpaired 192 5 Open Options 6 Remove phone from list G Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Gerat 2 Configure phone Remove phone from list Bluetooth audio O Bluetooth audio What to do if Information on suitable devices can be found at www bmwu
34. Switch off rear view camera The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Image on the Control Display Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Ry Rear view camera The image of the rear view camera is dis played The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Malfunction A Check Control message refer to page 82 is displayed in the instrument cluster The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap pear in shaded form on the Control Display PDC has failed Have the system checked To ensure full operability gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Rear view camera The concept The rear view camera assists you when park ing and maneuvering in reverse To accom plish this the region behind your vehicle is shown on the Control Display System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the backup camera Detection of objects High protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the backup camera lt Switching on automatically With t
35. conditions allow Otherwise the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in dan ger because of the distraction from driving For reasons of safety some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta tionary Operating Apps 1 Connect the mobile phone via the snap in adapter or via the USB audio interface 2 ConnectedDrive 3 Select the desired software application Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed 1 ConnectedDrive 2 BMW apps Notes gt The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the mobile phone gt The data transmission of the software ap plications from the mobile phone to the ve hicle can last some time Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone gt Some mobile phones cannot simultane ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands free system If necessary restart the software applica tion on the mobile phone after a phone conversation Remote Services With Remote Services a connection can be established between a mobile phone and the vehicle This connection can be used for ex ample to lock and unlock the vehicle Depending on the vehicle additional functions may be available To be able to use the functions the My BMW Remote app must be downloade
36. gt Automatic call up of the driver s seat posi tion after unlocking refer to page 35 gt Settings for the display on the Control Dis play and in the instrument cluster gt 12h 24h clock format refer to page 78 gt Date format refer to page 79 Brightness of the Control Display refer to page 80 gt Language on the Control Display refer to page 79 gt Units of measure for fuel consumption distance covered remaining distances and temperature refer to page 77 gt Show visual warning for the Park Distance Control PDC refer to page 106 gt rearview camera gt Function selection refer to page 107 gt Type of display refer to page 109 gt Light settings gt Triple turn signal activation refer to page 64 Welcome lights refer to page 85 gt Headlight courtesy delay feature refer to page 86 gt Daytime running lights refer to page 86 gt High beam Assistant refer to page 87 gt Automatic climate control AUTO program cooling function and automatic recircu lated air control activated deactivated temperature air flow rate and distribution refer to page 110 gt Navigation gt Voice activation refer to page 157 gt Route criteria refer to page 155 gt Map view settings refer to page 159 gt Entertainment gt Tone control refer to page 166 gt Radio stored stations refer to page 174 gt CD multimedia audio source listened to last refer
37. issued 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph 5 km h Displaying setting or changing the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Warning at amp Speed TA Warning at 6km h O Warning Select current speed 4 Turnthe controller until the desired limit is displayed 5 Press the controller The speed limit is stored Applying your current speed as the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Select current soeed The system adopts your current speed as the limit Activating deactivating the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 3 Warning 84 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Lamps Controls Lamps Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance 1 Automatic headlamp control Adaptive Light Control High beam Assistant wel come lamps daytime running lights Lamps off daytime running lights Parking lamps daytime running lights Lo
38. refer to page 66 3 Squeeze the locking spring arrows 1 and fold out the wiper blade arrow 2 4 Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism toward the front 5 Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order making sure it engages Risk of damage Before opening the hood ensure that the wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the window otherwise damage may occur lt 249 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Replacing components Fold up and hold the wiper arm 2 Squeeze the locking spring arrows 1 and fold out the wiper blade arrow 2 3 Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism toward the front Lamp and bulb replacement Notes Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool otherwise there is the danger of getting burned Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer 250 Do
39. 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Office Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is con nected to the vehicle The number of transmit ted pictures depends on the mobile phone The mobile phone must support this function Office Contacts Open Options Configure Bluetooth 5 Show images npr Display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted Office Contacts Highlight the contact Open Options Delete contact or Delete all contacts eo n So If necessary Yes Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported Text mes sages and e mails may not be supported by the service provider or the function may need to be enabled separately After the mobile phone is first paired transmission may take several minutes Messages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary Messages from the additional telephone are not transmitted 212 Displaying messages 1 Office 2 Messages A symbol identifies the type of message Symbol Message type ez Text messages bd MyInfo pa Message from the Concierge serv 7 ice ig
40. 279 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Brake Sys tem 99 Accident refer to Emergency Request initiating 257 Acoustic signal refer to Check Control 82 Activated charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 113 Adaptive brake lights refer to Brake force display 98 Adaptive Light Control 86 Additional telephone 198 Additives coolant 246 Additives engine oil 245 After washing vehicle 264 Airbags 90 Airbags indicator warning light 93 Air circulation refer to Recir culated air mode 112 Air conditioning mode auto matic climate control 110 Air conditioning mode venti lation 113 Air distribution auto matic 111 Air distribution manual 111 Air drying refer to Cooling function 112 Air flow rate 112 Airing refer to Ventila tion 113 Air pressure refer to Tire in flation pressure 232 Air supply automatic climate control 110 Air supply ventilation 113 280 Air vents refer to Ventila tion 113 Alarm system 41 Alarm system avoiding unin tentional alarms 42 Alarm system ending an alarm 41 Alarm system interior motion sensor 42 Alarm system tilt alarm sen sor 42 All around the headliner 19 ALL program 112 All season tires refer to Win ter tires 240 All wheel drive refer to xDrive 101 Alternating code hand held transmitter 116 AM FM station 168 Announcement
41. 292 Turn signals triple turn signal activation 64 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG 238 Unintentional alarms 42 Units average fuel consump tion 77 Units of measure changing on the Control Display 77 Units temperature 77 Universal remote control 115 Unlocking from the inside 37 Unlocking from the out side 34 Unlocking hood 243 Unlocking setting the unlock ing characteristics 34 Unlocking the tailgate 40 Unlocking without remote control refer to Comfort Ac cess 39 Updates made after the edito rial deadline 6 Update software 193 Upholstery care 264 USB audio interface 187 USB interface 125 V Vacuum cleaner connecting refer to Connecting electri cal devices 119 Vanity mirror 119 Vehicle battery chang Ing 255 Vehicle breaking in 132 Vehicle care 264 Vehicle care refer to Care 263 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification num ber 198 Vehicle identification number refer to Identification num ber in the engine compart ment 242 Vehicle jack 255 Vehicle paint 264 Vehicle storage 266 Vehicle switching off 61 Vehicle wash 263 Ventilation 113 Ventilation draft free 113 Ventilation refer to Parked car ventilation 113 Version of the navigation data 144 Video playback 178 Voice activation naviga tion 152 Voice activation short com mands 272 Voice activation system 27 Volume setting 166 W Warning and indicator lamps 17 Warning messa
42. 75 Average fuel consumption setting the unit 77 Average speed 75 Average speed refer to Com puter 75 Axle loads refer to Weights 270 Backrest curvature refer to Lumbar support 47 Backrests refer to Seats 46 Backrest width adjust ment 48 Back seats adjusting the backrest tilt 121 Backup camera 107 Backup camera obstacle marking 108 Backup camera pathway lines 108 Backup camera turning lines 108 Backup lamps bulb replace ment 254 Balance 166 Band aids refer to First aid kit 258 Bass 166 Battery disposal 256 Battery refer to Vehicle bat tery 255 Battery remote control 32 Battery replacement remote control for vehicle 41 Before entering the car wash 263 Being towed 260 Belts refer to Safety belts 48 Belt tensioners refer to Safety belts 48 Beverage holder refer to Cu pholder 127 Black and white map dis play 160 Blower refer to Air flow rate 112 Bluetooth audio 189 Bluetooth connection acti vating deactivating 199 BMW Apps 224 BMW Driver s Guide App 6 BMW EfficientDynamics re fer to Saving fuel 139 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys tem 247 BMW Online 222 Bottle holder refer to Cu pholder 127 Brake assistant 99 Brake discs breaking in 132 Brake fluid refer to Service requirements 80 Brake force display 98 Brake force distribution elec tronic 99 Brake lamps brake force dis play 98 Brake lamps bulb replace men
43. Cargo straps securing cargo 137 Car key refer to Integrated key remote control 32 Carpet care 265 Car phone installation loca tion refer to Center arm rest 126 Car phone refer to Tele phone 198 Car vacuum cleaner connect ing refer to Connecting electrical devices 119 Car wash 263 Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 133 CBS Condition Based Serv ice 247 CD DVD 176 CD notes 180 CDs storing 181 Cell phone installation loca tion refer to Center arm rest 126 Center armrest front 126 Center armrest rear 126 Center brake lamp bulb re placement 255 Center console refer to Around the center con sole 18 Central locking Comfort Ac cess 39 Central locking from the in side 37 Central locking from the out side 33 Central locking setting the unlocking characteristics 34 Central screen refer to Con trol Display 20 282 Changes technical refer to Safety 7 Changing wheels tires 239 Check Control 82 Children transporting 54 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 55 Child restraint fixing sys tems 54 Child restraint fixing systems mounting 54 Child safety locks 57 Child seat mounting 54 Child seats refer to Trans porting children safely 54 Chrome parts care 265 Cigarette lighter connecting electrical devices 119 Cigarette lighter refer to Lighter 119 Cigarette lighter socket 119 Circulation of air refer to Re circulated air mode 112 Cleanin
44. E mail from mobile phone Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message exists 1 Filter 1 amp Messages Filter Service message Mylnfo E Hemden und Textilreinigung Concierge ci Tankstelle Tank amp Shop Concierge fi Hotel Munich 2 Select the type of message gt AI All messages are displayed gt E mail Only e mails from the mobile phone are displayed gt Service message Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service and My Info are dis played gt Text message Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Office Communication Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service and My Info can be deleted Delete a message Office Messages Select the desired message Open Options A YS Delete message Delete all messages Office Messages Open Options se YS Delete all messages or Delete service messages Text messages Calling the sender of a text message 1 Select the desired message 2 y Select the symbol Saving the sender in the contacts 1 Highlight the desired message 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 216 Reading the t
45. II 15 Entertainment _ Radio If there is no message the system changes to the My Favorites category All favorites cur rently being broadcast can be selected from a list Managing the favorites Activating deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually 1 Satellite radio 2 Yt Manage favorites 3 Select Activate alert or the desired favor ites The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Deleting favorites 1 Satellite radio yt Manage favorites Highlight the desired favorite Open Options ae Delete entry Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes Selecting a region Radio Satellite radio Open Options Set jump as Sh a Select the desired region The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Activating deactivating the jump 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 fA Jump to 174 Information for the selected region is broad cast as soon as it is available A new panel opens Canceling the Traffic Jump Cancel Symbol Meaning vas Information will be broadcast shortly fy Information is currently being broadcast Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump Automatic update About twice a year Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions The up date takes place automatically and may
46. Recommended fuel grade 230 Recommended tire brands 240 Redialing 205 Refueling 228 Remaining distance to desti nation refer to Com puter 76 Remaining range for service refer to Service require ments 80 Remaining range refer to Range 75 Reminders 216 Remote app 225 Remote control 32 Remote control battery re placement 41 Remote control Comfort Ac cess 39 Remote control garage door opener 115 Remote control malfunc tion 36 Remote control removing from the ignition lock 59 Remote control service data 247 Remote control tailgate 35 Remote control univer sal 115 Remote inquiry 204 Remote Services 225 Replacement fuse 256 Replacement remote con trol 32 Replacing wheels tires 239 Reporting safety defects 9 Reserve warning refer to Fuel gauge 4 Reservoir for washer fluid re fer to Washer fluid reser voir 67 Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Restraining systems refer to Safety belts 48 Restraint systems for chil dren 54 Retaining straps securing cargo 137 Retreaded tires 240 Reverse gear automatic transmission with Step tronic 68 Rim cleaner care 265 Road avoiding 155 Road detour 155 Roadside Assistance 221 Roadside parking lamp bulb replacement 253 Roadside parking lights 87 RON recommended fuel grade 230 RON refer to Fuel qual ity 230 Roof load capacity 270 Roof mounted luggage rack 138 Rope refer to Towing 261 Route 156 Route
47. Split screen Switch off control display Contacts New contact Delete all contacts Display first last name Office 5 The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries Delete input fields 6 Fill in the entry fields select the symbol next to the entry field 7 Enter the text and assign the contact type 8 Ifthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system enter the address Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all ad dresses If necessary Accept address 9 Store contact in vehicle Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses Home phone number Business phone number o gt ES Mobile phone number Ay Other phone number Home address ifii Business address Specifying the home address A home address can be stored It appears at the top of the contact list Office Contacts Home Create a contact EE a o Store contact in vehicle Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order Office Contacts Open Options pmu S Display last first name or Display first last name Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der 211 Online Edition for Part no 01 40
48. The concept The system monitors the tire pressure in the four mounted tires The system issues a warn ing if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire pressure Notes Tire damage caused by external influen ces Sudden tire damage caused by external influ ences cannot be indicated in advance To operate the system also note the additional information and instructions contained under Tire inflation pressure refer to page 232 Functional requirements The system must have been reset while the in flation pressure was correct otherwise reliable signaling of pressure loss is not ensured Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla tion pressure and after changing a tire or wheel Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly Status display 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 TPM The status is displayed Status indicator on the Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account All wheels are green The system is active and issues warnings in case of deviations from the tire inflation pres sures stored last TPM active appears on the Control Display One wheel is yellow Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire A message appears on the Control D
49. To deactivate y Automatic time shift he hb Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor ites list Available favorites are artist track game league and team Storing the artist track or game It is only possible to store favorites that are currently being broadcast The channel infor mation must be available 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 5 Press the controller again 6 Select the artist track or game Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favor ites from a selection list 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Xt Manage favorites 4 Add sports information A1 i GF Favorites W Activate alert ah Artists amp The Fray I f Titles EY Proud Mary 1969 EY Livin On A Prayer 1987 Add sports information 5 Select the league 6 Select Add all teams or the desired team Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back the fol lowing message appears for approx 20 sec onds Favorite alert v Favorites Select the symbol while the message is shown Satellite radio vr Favorite alert fa Proud Mary 1969 All Channels i Sirius Hits1 002 StarLite Sirius Love Movin EZ i ie 001 wi Favorites ka The displayed favorite is played 173 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052
50. Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Car washes Notes Steam jets or high pressure washers When using steam jets or high pressure washers hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 F 60 C Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long term damage Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure washer lt Do not direct steam or high pressure washers toward the decorative labels applied by the manufacturer otherwise damage may result Cleaning sensors cameras with high pressure washers When using high pressure washers do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras for Park Distance Control or the backup camera for instance for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm lt Regularly remove foreign bodies such as leaves from the area below the windshield when the hood Is open Wash your vehicle frequently particularly in winter Intense
51. a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 West wood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotl
52. alarm unlock the vehicle with the remote control or insert the remote control into the ignition lock all the way and switch on the ignition Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened using the remote control even if the alarm system is armed Press the button on the remote control After the tailgate is closed it is locked and monitored again by the alarm system The haz ard warning system flashes once In some market specific versions the tailgate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first Switching off the alarm gt Unlock the vehicle using the remote con trol refer to page 34 gt Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror gt The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds The system is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking The doors hood or tailgate is not closed properly but the rest of the vehicle is se cured The indicator lamp flashes continuously af ter approx 10 seconds The interior motion sensor is not active gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing The vehicle has not been tampered with gt Ifthe indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition but for no longer than approx 5 minutes A
53. all services available in the vehicle 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Status 224 3 Available services EF Service Status Update BMW Assist Available services Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Status 3 Update BMW Assist Data transfer During the updating of BMW services display the status of the data transfer 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Open Options 3 Data transfer Apps Ata glance Certain software applications of a suitable mo bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle These software applications are displayed on the Control Display They are operated via iDrive Requirements gt The mobile phone is suitable gt The mobile phone operating system sup ports the software applications of Apps gt Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and ready to use Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication gt Corresponding mobile wireless contract Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps gt Use only BMW approved software applica tions otherwise it may result in malfunc tions Information about suitable mobile phones available software applications and their instal lation can be found at www bmw com connec tivity or at the service center Create the entries Make entries only when traffic and road
54. and right roadside parking lamps The vehicle can be illuminated on one side Switching on After parking the vehicle press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point for ap prox 2 seconds arrow 3 The roadside parking lights drain the battery Therefore do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the en gine Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point arrow 3 High beam Assistant The concept When the lights are switched on this system automatically switches the high beams on and off The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror The as sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual Activating the High beam Assistant 1 Turn the light switch to 20 2 With the low beams switched on briefly push the turn indicator lever in the direc tion of the high beam A The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up The high beams are switched on and off automatically The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you and to adequate illumination e g in towns and cities 87 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Lamps Switching the high beams on and
55. armrest gt File systems standard file systems for USB devices are supported The FAT 32 format is recommended 1 Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment refer to page 125 CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options Music data import export 2 3 4 oF 6 Import export USB Import music USB Import music USB Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB Playing music Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album refer to page 184 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Music search GF Music collection q Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio CD 1 v Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS 4 Select the desired category GF Music search Genre All genres All artists All albums All titles Start play New search 5 Select the desired entry gt Select A Z search refer to page 25 and input the desired entry gt Select the desired entry from the list 6 Select other categories if you wish The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order Not all categories need to be selected For example to search for all tracks by a cer tain artist call up that artist only All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed 7
56. as for cleaning lt Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required Otherwise the brake system may overheat re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency You can increase the engine s braking effect by shifting down going all the way to first gear if necessary Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission refer to page 68 Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped as doing so disables engine braking In addition steering and brake assist are un available with the engine stopped 134 Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by gt Low mileage gt Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all gt Infrequent use of the brakes Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by t
57. be opened from the outside lt 34 Unlocking E Press the button The vehicle is unlocked The welcome lamps interior lamps and cour tesy lamps are switched on You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Unlock button sc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock 4 Select the desired function gt All doors E The entire vehicle is unlocked gt Driver s door only E Only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle Convenient opening A Press and hold the button on the remote control The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof open Locking Lock Press the button on the remote con trol Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge lt Switching on the interior lamps and courtesy lamps Lock Press the button on the remote con trol with the vehicle locked Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 s
58. bility Control DSC 99 Exchanging wheels tires 239 Exhaust system 133 Exterior mirrors 51 Exterior mirrors adjusting 51 Exterior mirrors automatic dimming 52 Exterior mirrors automatic heating 52 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 52 External audio device 126 External devices 186 External temperature dis play 73 External temperature display changing the unit of meas ure 77 External temperature display on computer 77 External temperature warn ing 73 Eyes for securing cargo 137 E Fader 166 Failure messages refer to Check Control 82 False alarm avoiding uninten tional alarms 42 False alarm ending an alarm 41 Fastening safety belts refer to Safety belts 48 Fault messages refer to Check Control 82 Filling capacities 271 Filter refer to Microfilter acti vated charcoal filter with au tomatic climate control 113 Fine wood care 265 First aid kit 258 Fitting for towing 261 Flashing when locking unlocking 35 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93 Flat Tire Monitor FTM snow chains 241 Flat tire run flat tires 241 Flat tire Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 95 Flat tire warning light 94 96 Flat tire wheel change 255 Flooding refer to Driving through water 133 Floor carpet care 265 Floor mats care 265 FM AM station 168 Fog lamps indicator lamp 88 Fog lights 88 Foldable rear seat back rest 121 Folding sun visor 119 Foot brake 133 Footwell lights refer to Inte rior ligh
59. by other messages on the device gt Switch off the button tones and other sig nal tones on the device Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati cally gt Switch the radio on and off again Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also connected via the USB interface or the snap in adapter gt Disconnect one of the two connections for example disconnect the audio connection refer to page 192 Start playback again If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available please contact the hotline or service center Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version With a software update the vehicle can sup port new mobile phones or new external de vice for example gt USB Software updates and related current infor mation is available at www bmw com update Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed 1 Settings 2 Software update 3 Show current version Select desired version to display additional in formation Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary 1 Store the file for the software update in the main director of a USB flash drive 2 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au dio interface in the
60. can be obtained from the service center Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle Based on this Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile Details on the service requirements refer to page 80 can be displayed on the Control Dis play On the Control Display the remaining distan ces and times for selected maintenance re quirements and any legally required deadlines can be displayed individually refer to page 80 Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle Therefore hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently Setting the correct date Make sure the date is set correctly refer to page 78 otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured lt Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count If this occurs have a service center update the time dependent maintenance procedures such as checking brake fluid and if necessary changing the engine oil and the microfilter activated charcoal filter 247
61. car is equipped with a rain sensor the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield directly in front of the interior rearview mirror Activating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor Press the button arrow 3 The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and a wiping cycle is started Setting intermittent wipe or the sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down Deactivating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor Press the button again arrow 3 The LED goes out 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash otherwise damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation lt Cleaning the windshield and headlamps Pull the lever arrow 4 The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly When the vehicle lighting system is switched on the headlights are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield oth erwise your vision could be obscured For this reason use antifreeze Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty otherwise you could damage the pump
62. creeping after you select a driving position maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start CS ag A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag ing selector lever positions R and P To cancel the lock press the button on the front of the selector lever see arrow 68 P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary The rear wheels are locked R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes for example The vehicle can roll D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are selected automatically Under normal operating conditions fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position Sport program and manual mode M S Activating the Sport program Move the selector lever from position D toward the left DS is displayed in the instrument cluster This position is recommended for a perform ance oriented driving style To deactivate the Sport program or manual mode M S move the selector lever to the right into position D Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Activating the M S manual mode Move the selector lever from position D toward the left Push the selector
63. criteria route 155 Route displaying 156 Route section bypass Ing 156 RSC Runflat System Compo nent refer to Run flat tires 241 Rubber components care 265 289 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Run flat tires 241 Run flat tires tire inflation pressure 232 S Safe braking 133 Safety 7 Safety belts care 265 Safety belts damage 49 Safety belts indicator warn ing lamp 49 Safety belts reminder 49 Safety switch for rear win dows 43 Safety systems airbags 90 Safety systems safety belts 48 Safety tires refer to Run flat tires 241 Satellite radio 170 Saving fuel 139 Scale changing during navi gation 158 Screen refer to Control Dis play 20 Search refer to BMW On line 222 Seat adjustment electric 47 Seat adjustment manual 46 Seat and mirror memory 50 Seat belts 48 Seat heating 48 Seats 46 Seats adjusting 46 Seats memory refer to Seat and mirror memory 50 Seats sitting safely 46 Selector lever automatic transmission with Step tronic 68 70 Selector lever lock overrid ing 69 Selector lever lock refer to Changing the selector lever positions shiftlock 68 290 Selector lever lock releas ing 70 Selector lever positions auto matic transmission with Steptronic 68 Sensors care 266 Service and warranty 8 Service data in the remote control 247 Service interval display refer to Condition Base
64. destinations Highlight the destination Open Options Edit destination a ie Pe Deleting the last destinations 1 Navigation Last destinations Highlight the destination Open Options o gt oe a Delete entry or Delete all last destinations Special destinations General information Even with the latest navigation data informa tion on specific Points of Interest may have 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination entry changed for example gas stations might not be in operation Opening the search for Points of Interest Selection of Points of Interest such as hotels or tourist attractions 1 Navigation 2 Points of Interest 3 Select the search function Online Search 1 Google Local Search 2 Select a special destination 3 Select the symbol 4 Start guidance A Z search 1 A Z search Town City Select or enter the town city Category Select the category oe f Category details For some Points of Interest multiple cate gory details can be selected Move the controller to the left to leave the category details 7 Keyword 8 Enter the keyword A list of the Points of Interest is displayed 9 Select a special destination Details are displayed If multiple details are stored you can leaf through the pages If a phone number is available a connec tion can be established if necessary
65. each engine start It is acti vated whenever you drive forward faster than 3 mph 5 km h Automatic engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions Automatic transmission gt The selector lever is in transmission posi tion D gt The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is at a standstill gt The driver s safety belt is fastened or the driver s door is closed When the engine is switched off the air vol ume of the automatic climate control is re duced Indicator light in the instrument cluster suet The indicator lamp lights up when the A Auto Start Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically 27 The indicator lamp lights up if the re Gil quirements for an automatic engine stop are not fulfilled gt STOP Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations gt External temperature too low gt High external temperature and operation of the automatic climate control gt The interior is not yet heated or cooled as much as desired 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving gt The engine is not yet at operating temper ature gt Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel is being turned gt After driving in reverse V Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on Vehicle battery charge is ver
66. eject General malfunctions gt CD DVD players have been optimized for performance in vehicles In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs DVDs than stationary devices would be gt Ifa CD DVD cannot be played first check whether it has been inserted correctly Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD DVD or the laser s scan lens and temporarily prevent playback Malfunctions involving individual CDs DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs DVDs this can be due to one of the following Causes Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Self recorded CDs DVDs gt Possible reasons for malfunctions with self recorded CDs DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes or poor quality or old age of the blank CD DVD gt Only label CDs DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose Damage gt Avoid fingerprints dust scratches and moisture Store CDs DVDs in a sleeve gt Do not subject CDs DVDs to temperatures over 122 F 50 C high humidity or direct sunlight CDs DVDs with copy protection CDs DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer This can mean that some CDs DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US paten
67. event of an accident lt Outer rear seats K 7 Direction of travel Head restraint Cargo area floor Hook for upper retaining strap Mounting point eye Backrest NO fh WN Upper retaining strap When using the cargo cover pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Transporting children safely Controls Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point On outer rear seats Slide the head restraint upward 2 Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint 3 Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye 4 Pullthe retaining strap taut Center rear seat On center rear seat atl 2 1 Route the upper retaining strap over the middle of the head restraint 7 2 Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye 3 Pull the retaining strap taut until it com ji 3 presses the cushion of the head restraint a thus preventing the strap from sliding off Direction of travel Head restraint Locking the doors and Cargo area floor windows Hook for upper retaining strap Rear doors Mounting point eye Backrest NO oO fh WN Upper retaining strap When using the cargo cover pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover Push the locking lever on the rear doors down The door ca
68. fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc gt If the sensor view field is dirty The view field of the sensor is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror Do not cover this area with stickers etc Clean the sensor view field with a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner Fog lights Front fog lamps The low beams must be switched on 5 Press the button The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up If the automatic headlamp control refer to page 86 is activated the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Lamps Instrument lighting The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness 1 Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the dis play accompanied by the brightness set ting and the word SET BEBBOOOO00 SET 2 Press button 2 3 Push button 1 up or down to select the de sired brightness level Ww i f jaisisieia min max 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the external tem perature and the time Interior lights General information The interior lights footwell lights cargo area lights and courtesy lights are controlled auto matically The LEDs for the courtesy lights are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors To avo
69. in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Controls a 0 AEE N Volume on off Eject CD DVD CD DVD drive Change the entertainment source Change station track ont N Programmable memory buttons Sound output Switching on off When the ignition is switched off press ON OFF button on the radio 176 Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running press the ON OFF button on the radio CD DVD Playback Loading the CD DVD player Insert the CD DVD with the printed side up Playback begins automatically Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files Starting playback A CD DVD is contained in the CD DVD player 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired CD or DVD G CD DVD v amp Best of Brothers in arms amp CD Rom amp Mezzanine G Reload Beautiful E Black Market Music Meaning CD DVD player Playable formats gt DVD DVD ROM DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DL DVD R DL DVD audio video part only DVD video Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment gt CD CD ROM CD R CD RW CD DA gt Compressed audio files MP3 WMA AAC M4A Audio playback Pr
70. in position P al though the ignition is switched on the brake is depressed and the button on the selector lever is pressed the selector lever lock can be overridden 1 Switch off the ignition 2 Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever 3 Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out 4 Using the screwdriver from the tool kit re fer to page 249 press the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position with the button pressed 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving Automatic transmission with Steptronic 8 gear Transmission positions D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are available Under normal operating conditions fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N is Neutral The vehicle can roll N remains engaged after the engine is switched off if the remote control remains in the ignition lock This function can be used in an automatic car wash refer to page 263 for example P is automatically engaged after ap prox 30 minutes P Park The drive wheels are blocked P is engaged automatically when the following con
71. in the turn indicator lever The oil level is checked and the reading displayed Possible displays Function Oil level OK Symbol Oil level is being checked This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface or about 5 mi nutes while the car is on the move 244 Symbol Function Oil at minimum level Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart 1 liter of engine oil refer to page 245 at the next opportunity Oil level is too high Overfilling oil damages the en gine Have the vehicle checked immediately The oil level sensor is defec tive INACTIVE i Do not add engine oil mn max It is possible to continue driv ing Note the newly calculated remaining mileage until the next oil service refer to page 80 Have the system checked as soon as possible Display via iDrive 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status NS Vehicle Info Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status 3 Engine oil level Possible messages gt Engine oil level OK gt Measurement not possible at this time gt Measuring engine oil level Duration with the engine running ap prox 3 minutes Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Engine compartment Mobility Duration while driving approx 5 minutes If engine oil was added it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading gt Engine oil level below minimum Add 1 q
72. lan guage settings Entering the address in a command 1 Ko wheel Press the button on the steering Enter address Wait for a request from the system Say the address in the suggested order oe o Continue making the entry as prompted by the system If necessary individually name the sepa rate components of the address e g the town city 152 Entering a town city separately The town city can be said as a complete word With the destination entry menu displayed 1 Gs Press the button on the steering wheel 2 City or Spell city 3 Wait for the system to prompt you for the town city 4 Say the name of the town city or name at least the first three letters Depending on the entry up to 20 towns cities may be suggested 5 Select a location gt Select a recommended town city Yes gt Select a different town city New entry gt Select an entry Entry lt for instance entry 2 gt Spell an entry Spell city 6 Continue making the entry as prompted by the system If there are several towns cities with the same name Townsi cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis 1 Select an entry gt Yes lt or Entry lt e g En try 2 2 Select the desired town city Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city On
73. lever forward or backward Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g M1 gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward gt To shift up press the selector lever back ward The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds e g it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel followed by the current gear Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel gt When the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears while in auto matic mode the transmission switches to manual mode gt If the shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time the transmission switches back to automatic mode If the selector lever is in the M S gear plane manual mode remains active Shift up briefly pull right shift paddle Shift down briefly pull left shift paddle The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds e g it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel followed by the current gear Overriding selector lever lock If the selector lever is locked
74. navigation see Spoken instruc tions 157 Antifreeze coolant 246 Antifreeze washer fluid 67 Antilock Brake System ABS 99 Anti slip control refer to Dy namic Stability Control DSC 99 Anti theft protection 34 Appointments 214 Approved axle loads refer to Weights 270 Approved engine oils 245 Approved gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 270 Armrest refer to Center arm rest 126 Arrival time refer to Com puter 76 Ashtray 119 Assistance with driving off refer to Drive off assis tant 102 Assistance with starting en gine refer to Jump start ing 258 Audio device external 126 Audio playback 177 Audio playback Blue tooth 189 Automatic air distribu tion 111 Automatic air flow rate 111 Automatic car wash 263 Automatic climate con trol 110 Automatic climate control automatic air distribu tion 111 Automatic cruise control 103 Automatic Curb Monitor 51 Automatic headlight con trol 86 Automatic recirculated air control 112 Automatic Start Stop func tion 61 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 67 70 Automatic transmission with Steptronic interlock 67 Automatic transmission with Steptronic kickdown 68 70 Automatic transmission with Steptronic overriding selec tor lever lock 69 AUTO program with auto matic climate control 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference AUX IN port 186 Average fuel consumption
75. off manually gt High beams on arrow 1 gt High beams off headlamp flasher arrow 2 To reactivate the High beam Assistant briefly push the turn indicator lever toward the high beams Activating deactivating via iDrive 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 High beam assistant amp Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal Py _ O Daytime running lamps U f O Welcome light Bi F amp High beam assistant The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use System limits Personal responsibility The High beam Assistant cannot serve as a Substitute for the driver s personal judg ment of when to use the high beams There fore manually switch off the high beams in sit uations where this is required to avoid a safety risk 88 The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following and driver intervention may be necessary gt In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation gt In detecting poorly lit road users such as pedestrians cyclists horseback riders and wagons when driving close to train or ship traffic and at animal crossings gt In tight curves on hilltops or in depres sions in cross traffic or half obscured on coming traffic on freeways gt In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs At low speeds gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is
76. on your vehicle to en sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 98 Brake force display The concept gt During normal brake application the outer brake lamps light up gt During heavy brake application the inner brake lamps light up in addition Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications thus increasing active Safety ABS is operational every time you start the en gine Electronic brake force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost It thus helps to achieve the short est possible brakin
77. read in its place In addition the text of that sec tion should be disregarded and the follow ing text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type other wise for example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body contact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle At page 243 under the heading Hood the sentence beginning If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded At page 248 under the heading Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof 14 12 The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer s ser vice center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle At page 250 and page 252 where it reads Do no
78. s Manual makes refer ence to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC You may elect to use other parts and accessories but if you do we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and or accessories are appropri ate for use on your vehicle At page 7 under the warranty section s dis cussion of homologation where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there At page 7 under the Parts and accesso ries section the sentence beginning For your own safety should be disregarded and the following the text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using genuine BMW parts and accessories In the fifth sen tence the word cannot should read does not At page 49 in the Checking and replacing safety belts section the text beginning Have the work performed only by your ser vice center should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly At page 134 under the heading Objects in the area around the pedals and at page 266 und
79. should not be changed the entries for the state province and town city can be skipped gt Destination guidance is started to the town city center if no street is entered Entering a state province L iii Press the button 2 Navigation 3 Enter address o Navigation Enter address Address book Last destinations Foints of Interest Map Stored trips Route information 4 Select State Province or the displayed state province Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Entering a town city 1 Select Town City Postal Code or the dis played town city Cy Enter address USA Town City Postal Code BEVERL Street House number Intersection Accept destination Points of Interest at loc 2 Select letters if necessary The list is narrowed down further with each entry 3 Move the controller to the right 4 Select the name of the town city from the list If there are several towns cities with the same name 1 Change to the list of town city names 2 Highlight the town city 3 Select the town city Entering the postal code 1 Select Town City Postal Code or the dis played town city 2 1 Select the symbol 3 Select the numbers 4 Change to the list of postal codes and towns cities 5 Highlight the entry 6 Selecting an entry Entering a street and intersection 1 Select Street or the displayed str
80. smallest turning cir cle on a flat road surface si gt When the steering wheel is turned only gt Three dimensionally shaped markings can one turning line is displayed be displayed in the image of the rear view camera Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive refer to page 109 Their color gradation corresponds to the mark ings in PDC This helps estimate the distance to the object pictured 108 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive refer to page 109 Activating assistance functions Several assistance functions can be active at the same time Showing the parking aid lines 7 Parking aid lines Pathway and turning lines are displayed Showing the obstacle marking Pa Obstacle marking Three dimensionally shaped markings are dis played Image on the Control Display Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated Ry Rear view camera The image of the rear view camera is dis played The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Brightness With the rear view camera switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With the rear view camera switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Camera The lens of
81. soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage Notes Note the following gt Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms gt Fold in the exterior mirrors otherwise they may be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle gt Deactivate the rain sensor refer to page 65 to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation gt Move the rear window wiper to its resting position deactivate it and protect it against damage Ask the car wash operator about any necessary protective measures gt Remove additional attachments for in stance a spoiler or telephone antenna if there is a risk that these may be damaged Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in 10 cm otherwise the vehicle body could be damaged lt Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps are taken 263 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Care Automatic transmission 1 Release the parking brake refer to page 63 2 Drive into the car wash 3 Depress the brake pedal if necessary 4 Engage the selector lever or transmission position N 5 Switch the engine off 6 Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll In 8 gear automatic tra
82. take several minutes Notes gt Reception may not be available in some situations such as under certain environ mental or topographic conditions The sat ellite radio has no influence on this gt The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall build ings or near trees mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations Calling up a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Radio Entertainment Storing a station The station currently selected is stored 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Store station F4 Store station 1 Hit Radio 2 Classic Radio 3 Chart Radio 4 News Radio 4 Select the desired memory location The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Deleting a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station 4 Open Options 5 Delete entry 175 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia CD multimedia Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found
83. the glove compartment 2 Release the damper from the bottom holder by applying pressure toward the front arrow 1 3 Unlock the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs arrows 2 and fold down A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the cur rent distributor Information on the fuses can be found on the back of the cover Spare fuses are available from the service cen ter Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Hazard warning flashers The button for the hazard warning system is located on the center console Do not fold in the exterior mirrors While driving and when using the turn signal hazard warning flashers do not fold in the exterior mirrors otherwise the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in the appropriate position and will be diffi cult to detect lt Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements gt Radio readiness is switched on gt The Assist syste
84. the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side This improves your view of the curb and other low lying obstacles when park ing for example Activating 1 asa Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver s side mirror position 51 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Adjusting 2 Shift into reverse or engage transmission position R Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger side mirror position Fold in and out Press button 2 Possible up to approx 15 mph 20 km h For example this is advantageous gt In car washes gt In narrow streets gt For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button otherwise they could be damaged de pending on the width of the vehicle Automatic heating Depending on the external temperature both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on 52 Interior rearview mirror Reducing the blinding effect e From behind when driving at night turn the knob Interior and exterior mirrors automatic dimming feature Two photocells are used for control gt Inthe mirror glass see arro
85. the selection are played back in random order 1 CD Multimedia Top 50 2 Music collection The 50 most frequently played tracks CD Multimedia Music collection Top 50 Select the desired track if necessary 4 Select the desired track if necessary oS 184 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 3 Open Options 4 Random AVIE Options Free memory Delete music collection CD Multimedia O O Random Music data import export Managing music Albums Renaming an album The name of the album if available is automat ically entered when the album is stored If the name is not available it can be changed later if desired CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the desired album Open Options a Se SS Rename album G Options Audio CD 1 Rename album Delete album Music collection Music data import export Free memory Delete music collection 6 Select the letters individually Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the desired album Open Options ay YS Delete aloum Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played CD Multimedia Music collection Highlight the directory or track
86. the service center check it if neces sary gt Malfunction have the system checked by your service center gt TPM could not be fully reset Reset the system again WD The small warning light flashes in yel L _ low and then lights up continuously Y the larger warning light comes on in yellow On the Control Display the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears No flat tire can be detected Display in the following situations gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency after leaving the area of the disturbance the system auto matically becomes active again Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Safety As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressu
87. to page 176 gt Telephone volume refer to page 202 Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver s door is closed The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following 33 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing gt Doors gt Tailgate gt Fuel filler flap Operating from the outside gt Via the remote control gt In cars with Comfort Access via the door handles on the driver s and front passen ger sides The following takes place simultaneously when locking unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control gt The welcome lamps interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off gt The alarm system is armed or disarmed refer to page 41 Operating from the inside Via the button for the central locking system refer to page 37 If the vehicle is locked from the inside the fuel filler flap remains unlocked If an accident of a certain severity occurs the central locking system unlocks automatically The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on Opening and closing from the outside Using the remote control General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then
88. turn the controller to the left What to do if Information on suitable mobile phones refer to page 198 Appointments tasks notes text messages or e mails from the mobile phone are not dis played gt The mobile phone is not capable of the missing function or is not connected cor rectly The Office function is deactivated The mobile phone is connected as an addi tional phone gt Appointments are older than 20 days or are more than 50 days in the future gt The tasks have been marked as completed or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Office Communication gt Depending on the number of stored ap pointments task notes and messages in the mobile phone not all are displayed in the vehicle Not all appointments and tasks from the mo bile phone are displayed at the right time gt The time zone time or date is incorrectly set on the Control Display and mobile phone The e mail attachment is not displayed gt E mails are transmitted without an attach ment Entries are not displayed in full length gt Text were already transmitted from the mobile phone in a shortened form gt Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle may take several mi nutes The contact pictures are not being displayed gt Upto 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle The E mail is displayed with a d
89. up to 100 mph 160 km h to achieve optimum driving comfort Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility These tire inflation pressures can also be not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of found on the driver s side door pillar when the tire damage and accidents lt driver s door is open Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km h Adjust the tire inflation pressures To drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph 160 km h adjust pressures to the re spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km h Otherwise tire damage and acci Do not exceed the maximum permissible dents could occur speed Observe all national and local maximum speed limits otherwise violations of the laws could occur The permissible maximum speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph 160 km h Do Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive28i Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph 160 km h Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar PSI with cold tires i h his Cold ambient temperature gt Pa 225 50 R 17 94 H M S A S RSC 2 2132 2 6 38 225 50 R 17 94 V 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 V M S A S RSC 2 4135 2 8 41 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 225 45 R 18 91 HM S RSC Front 225 45 R 18 91 V R
90. which menu item is currently selected for instance Vehicle status List of short commands of the voice activation system refer to page 272 Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog Help Additional commands for the help dialog gt Help with examples information about the current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced gt Help with voice activation information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced Example playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud in the same way as they are selected via the controller 1 Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary 2 Press the button on the steering wheel 3 gt C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back 4 C D 5 gt C D drive The CD is played back 28 6 Press the button on the steering wheel again to select a specific track 7 gt Track lt e g CD track 4 Via short commands Playback of the CD can also be started using a short command 1 Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary 2 Press the button on the steering wheel 3 gt C D drive Track e g CD track 4 Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version In the shorter variant of the voice dialog the announcements f
91. work coverage Starting BMW Online 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 BMW Online ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request 3 If necessary OK The BMW Online home page is displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication Operating BMW Online To start a search gt Turn the controller to highlight an element gt Press the controller to display an element Opening the start page 1 Open Options 2 Display start page Options Switch off control display Current page Display start page Reload Cancel loading BMW Online Loading a new page 1 Open Options 2 Reload Cancel 1 Open Options 2 Cancel loading Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle Calling Customer Relations Vehicle not equipped with TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Customer Relations The Customer Relations phone number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a connec tion is established to Customer Relations Vehicle equipped with TeleService 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Customer Relations 3 Start service Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to request the arrangement of a service appoint ment The TeleService data is tra
92. 0 With high speed tuning feature 236 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI dese roel alana in the table are indicated in bar PSI h h Cold ambient temperature Q 225 50 R17 94 V 2 6 38 3 0 44 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 W RSC 2 8 41 3 2 46 225 45 R 18 91 H M S RSC Front 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 2 8 41 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 3 0 44 Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 3 0 44 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 3 2146 Compact wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102 M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2160 Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires Tire size Example 225 45 R 17 91 V 225 nominal width in mm 45 aspect ratio in R radial tire code 17 rim diameter in inches 91 load rating not for ZR tires V speed rating before the R on ZR tires Speed letter Q up to 100 mph 160 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation DOT code DOT xxxx xxx 2313 xxxx manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx tire size and tire design 2313 tire age Tire age The tire manufacturing date is co
93. 0 2 954 052 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Bodywork contact between vehicles There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles otherwise there is a danger of shorting lt Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order otherwise there is the danger of injury from sparking lt The so called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery s posi tive terminal Pull the cover up and off lS The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal Connecting jumper cables 1 Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter minal 2 Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance 3 Attach the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started 4 Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as sistance 5 Attach the other end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine 1 Start the engine of the assisting vehicl
94. 2 Edit contact amp Contact Edit contact amp Bauer amp Melanie 49897654321 fis 49891234567 017088776655 S 4917088776655 3 Change the entries 4 Store contact in vehicle When a contact is edited the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the en try is stored in the vehicle Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the address When contacts from the mobile phone are used the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle In this case Correct the address 3 Start guidance or Add as another destination Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Office Communication tained in the vehicle The address can be checked for this purpose 1 Select the desired contact and highlight the address 2 Open Options 3 Check as destination 4 Correct and store the address if necessary If the address is corrected and stored a copy of it is stored in the vehicle The address is not changed on the mobile phone New contact General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers 2 addresses 3 e mail addresses and one Inter net address Office Contacts Open Options ie ke New contact 1 Options O
95. 40 2 954 052 II 15 Storage compartments Controls 129 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving tips This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions Driving tips eka Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Breaking in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speeds gt 4 500 rom and 100 mph 160 km h Avoid full throttle operation and use of the transmission s kickdown mode for the initial miles From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture tires do not achieve their full 132 tract
96. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen e g information from the computer In the divided screen view the so called split screen this information remains visible even when you change to another menu Switching the split screen on and off Press the button 2 Split screen Selecting the display Press the button 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller until the split screen is selected 4 Press the controller or select Split screen content 5 Select the desired menu item Split screen content EY Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position v Onboard info Trip computer Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly e g radio stations navigation destina Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance tions phone numbers and entry points into the menu The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Saving a function 1 Highlight the function via the iDrive 2 Press the desired button for more than two seconds Running a function Press the button TE The function will run immediately This means for example that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the b
97. Date Time zone Teeth Time 09 30 Format 24h Date 27 05 2012 Format tt mm jjjj 4 Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed and then press the control ler 5 Turn the controller until the desired mi nutes are displayed and then press the controller The time is stored Setting the time format 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Format 4 Select the desired format The time format is stored The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Personal Profile refer to page 32 Setting the date In the instrument cluster To set the dd mm or mm dd date format refer to Setting the date format below 1 Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the date and the word SET Press button 2 2 3 Use button 1 to set the day of the month 4 Press button 2 to confirm the entry 5 Set the month and the year in the same way 6 Press button 2 The system stores the new date Via the iDrive 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Date 4 Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed and then press the controller 5 Make the necessary settings for the month and year The date is stored Setting the d
98. Drive gt Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available gt Destination search town city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display 26 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance Voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The concept gt Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com mands The system prompts you to make your entries gt Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system gt The system uses a special microphone lo cated in the area of the interior rearview mirror gt 2 Verbal instructions in the Owner s Manual to use with the voice activation system Requirements Via the Control Display set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the sooken commands can be identi
99. HDC Hill Descent Control 101 D PS 18 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance All around the headliner 1 Emergency Request 257 4 z Reading lamps 89 SOS N 2 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 44 5 Interior lamps 89 3 ae Indicator lamp for the front pas a senger airbags 92 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive iDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches Thus these functions can be operated from a central location Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occupants and to other road users never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this Controls at a glance Controls 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons 20 The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly The controller can be used to select menu i
100. HLAND 3 Change the entries 4 Move the controller to the left 5 Yes If a contact from the mobile phone is edited the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the ve hicle and only this copy is displayed Under certain circumstances a contact entry with the same name is created Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the address When contacts from the mobile phone are used the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle In this case Correct the address 3 Start guidance or Add as another destination Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle The address can be checked for this purpose 1 Select the desired contact and highlight the address 2 Open Options 3 Check as destination 4 Correct and store the address if necessary If the address is corrected and stored a copy of it is stored in the vehicle The address is not changed on the mobile phone Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order 1 My contacts 2 Open Options 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Contacts 3 Display last first name or Display first last name Depending on how th
101. In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode the playback switches between analog and digital reception In this case switch off digital radio reception Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in HD2 HDS In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode the audible sig nal may be interrupted for several seconds This is reception related Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional informa tion on the current track such as the name of the artist 1 Select the desired station 2 Open Options 3 Station info Selecting a substation Ol This symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations The station name of the main station ends in HD1 Station names of the substations end in HD2 HD3 etc 1 Select the desired station 170 2 Press the controller 3 Select the substation When reception is poor the substation is muted Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages The packages must be enabled by tele phone Navigation bar overview Symbol Function ka kta cp Change the list view T Select the category c Direct channel entry 6 Timeshift vy y Open the My Favorites cate gory open a favorite yt Manage the favorites A Traffic Jump The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on
102. Only charge using the starting aid terminals refer to page 259 in the engine compartment while the engine is switched off Power failure After a temporary power loss some equipment needs to be reinitialized Individual settings need to be reprogrammed gt Seat and mirror memory store the posi tions again refer to page 50 Time update refer to page 77 Date update refer to page 78 Radio station save again refer to page 168 gt Navigation system wait for the navigation system to be operational gt Panoramic glass sunroof it may only be possible to tilt the roof Have the system initialized by the service center gt Digital compass recalibrate refer to page 117 gt xDrive the system automatically initializes as you drive During this time indicator lamps light up If the lamps do not disap pear during the current trip have the sys tem checked Disposing of old batteries SKY Have old batteries disposed of by your EY service center or bring them to a recy cling center 256 Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport Fuses Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating this could lead to a circuit overload ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle Access to fuse box 1 Open
103. Owner s Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine Col rl iis lt a THE BMW X1 OWNER S MANUAL BMW EfficientDynamics Less emissions More driving pleasure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 X1 Owner s Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW The more familiar you are with your vehicle the better control you will have on the road We therefore strongly suggest Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature We wish you a Safe and enjoyable drive BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW AG Munich deutsch II 15 03 15 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Addendum ADDENDUM TO OWNER S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Own
104. SC 2 4135 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 2 6 38 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 2 8 41 Compact wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102 M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph 160 km h Without high speed tuning feature with cold tires Cold ambient temperature gt 225 50 R 17 94 H M S A S RSC 2 4 35 2 9 42 225 45 R 18 91 V M S A S RSC 225 50 R 17 94 V 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar PSI r ip 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 H M S RSC Front 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 2 4135 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 2 9 42 Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 2 9 42 Compact wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102 M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2160 With high speed tuning feature Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar PSI with cold tires R Ip Cold ambient temperature gt s 225 50 R 17 94 V 2 4135 2 9 42 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 W RSC 2 6 38 3 1 45 225 45 R 18 91 H M S RSC Front 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 2 9 42 Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 2 8 41 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 3 1 45 Compact wheel
105. Select a destination that is as Close as possible to the original gt Is the map displayed in shades of gray Traffic conditions gray map active The Control Display changes to a black and white display This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins gt Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions The area has not yet been fully recorded or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio stations and playing CDs DVDs and tracks from the music collection Entertainment _ Tone Tone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Treble bass balance and fader gt Treble treble adjustment gt Bass depth adjustment gt Balance left right volume distribution
106. Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102 M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2160 Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph 160 km h All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar PSI with cold tires R Ip Cold ambient temperature gt e 225 50 R 17 94 H M S A S RSC 2 2132 2 6 38 225 50 R 17 94 H RSC 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 V M S A S RSC 2 4135 2 8 41 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 225 45 R 18 91 H M S RSC 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Front 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 2 4135 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 2 6 38 Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 2 8 41 Compact wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102 M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2160 Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph 160 km h Without high speed tuning feature All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar PSI with cold tires RERER O Cold ambient temperature rs s 225 50 R 17 94 H M S A S RSC 2 4135 2 9 42 225 50 R 17 94 H RSC 225 50 R 17 94 H M S RSC 225 45 R 18 91 V M S A S RSC 2 6 38 3 1 45 225 45 R 1891 V RSC 225 45 R 18 91 H M S RSC Front 225 45 R 18 91 V RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 40 R 18 95 V RSC 2 9 42 Front 225 40 R 19 89 W RSC 2 6 38 Rear 255 35 R 19 92 W RSC 2 9 42 Compact wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 17 102M 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 6
107. Start play The list of tracks is repeated automatically Restarting the music search New search 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Music search by voice Albums Instructions for voice activation system refer All stored albums listed in order of their stor to page 27 age dates 1 M Press the button on the steering wheel Audio CD 2 Music search O Compressed audio files 3 Open the desired category e g Select iaa o 1 CD Multimedia 4 Say the desired enue in ie lias 2 Music collection 5 Select other cavegoleee l you wish d Gebe hedesredabum Ieee Bie Crees IU ae Depending on the album the tracks or the Say the voice command and the name of the subdirectories of the album are displayed desired track in a single command The first track is played automatically if possible Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by GF Music collection the music search or the album that was se Q Music search lected last Current playback 1 roll Top 50 1 CD Multimedia Audio cb 1 2 Music collection fps 3 Current playback Vv Frank LIEBLINGSSONGS 1 GF Music collection A Music search 4 Change directories if needed to select Current playback tracks Top 50 To go up a level in the directory move the Audio CD 1 controller to the left v Frank USB 1 Random playback LIEBLINGSSONGS All tracks of
108. The Roadside Assistance number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a connection is established to Roadside As sistance ConnectedDrive BMW Assist Concierge Messages w Roadside Assistance BMW Online Customer Relations Service Request Starting Roadside Assistance with TeleService In vehicles equipped with TeleService support is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and then if necessary by TeleService Help 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Roadside Assistance 3 Start service F Roadside Assistance Start service Service ready TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis These data are transmitted automatically 222 After the data are transmitted the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re estab lished BMW Online At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Online License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co Ltd Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co Ltd All rights reserved NetFront is a trademark or registered trade mark of ACCESS CO LTD in Japan and other countries This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Requirements gt Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan gt The date setting on the Control Display is current gt The vehicle is located within wireless net
109. The maximum ground clearance is 8 in ches 20 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo gt When driving through water do not exceed the maximum water height of 12 in ches 30 cm and drive at walking speed gt After driving through water press on the brake pedal several times at low speeds to dry the brakes gt Depending on the prevailing terrain acti vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC refer to page 100 briefly gt When the wheels spin accelerate to ena ble the driving stability control systems to distribute the drive force to the individual wheels After driving on poor roads Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi cle safety gt Remove excessive accumulations of dirt and mud from the vehicle body gt Clear mud snow ice etc from the wheels and tires and check for damage 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving tips jem Loading Loading Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry ing
110. The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions For a vehicle containing an average load the possible driving distance is ap prox 50 miles 80 km When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire its handling characteristics change e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Adjust your driving style accord ingly Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed road conditions external temperature cargo load etc Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A loss of tire inflation pressure results ina change in the handling characteristics e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Safety Controls Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center lt Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
111. Then drive at least one To change the zone setting briefly press the full circle at a maximum speed of adjustment button repeatedly until the display 4 mph 7 km h When the system is cali shows the number of the compass zone corre brated the C is replaced by the compass sponding to the current location directions The compass is operational again after approx The digital compass is set for right hand or Calibrating the digital compass left hand steering at the factory The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations Setting the language Press the adjustment button for 12 13 sec onds Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English E and Ger man O gt An incorrect compass direction is shown gt The cardinal direction displayed does not change even if the direction of travel changes Es The setting is automatically saved after approx gt Not all compass directions are shown 10 seconds Procedure 1 Make sure that there are no large metal ob jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity of the vehicle and that there is enough space to drive ina circle 118 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Sun visor Lighter With the engine running or the ignition Glare protection switched on press in the cigarette lighter 1 i The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops Folding down hackout Fold the sun visor down Danger
112. Therefore switch off these functions if they are not actually needed 140 Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life Have the maintenance carried out by your service center Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem refer to page 247 ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high fuel economy Engine control and comfort functions such as the climate control system are adjusted accordingly In addition situation related information can be displayed that helps the driver achieve lower fuel consumption The resulting range extension can be dis played in the instrument cluster Activating ECO PRO seem Press the button the LED above the GS button lights up ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster and DSC is activated if necessary Displays in the instrument cluster ECO PRO gt gt 100 mis 032050 123 8 After activation ECO PRO and the bonus range are displayed in the instrument cluster Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Saving fuel Drivingtips tips ECO PRO bonus range To achieve better fuel economy the actual The vehicle s cruising range can be extended temperature may vary slightly from the set by adjusting your driving style temperature and the passenger compartment h lowly This extended range can be displayed as a bo eee en Coe Ouy nus range in the instrum
113. Track 172 Selecting a category 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 K Category 4 Select the desired category Timeshift Approx one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer Prerequisite the signal must be available The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast When the buffer is full the older tracks are overwritten The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected Opening the timeshift function 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Replay Time shift Snow Patrol SJE Chasing Cars gt The red arrow shows the current playback position gt The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar gt For live transmissions live Timeshift menu ag Go to the live broadcast gt Playback pause Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Radio Entertainment AH Next track KI Previous track D Fast forward KA Reverse Y y Automatic timeshift deactivated activated Automatic timeshift When the function is activated audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of gt Incoming and outgoing telephone calls gt Activation of the voice activation system gt Muting The audio playback then continues with a time delay To activate Radio Satellite radio Replay Time shift A Automatic time shift
114. accumulated 246 es indicates the coolant level The coolant level is correct if it is between the arrows of the respective reservoir label 2 gt If the coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 5 Turn the cap until there is an audible click 6 Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis posing of coolant additives Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Maintenance Mobility Maintenance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations BMW Maintenance System A amp Vehicle status The maintenance system provides information on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle Service scopes and intervals may vary with the country version Replacement work spare parts fuels and lubricants and wear materials are calculated separately Additional informa tion
115. ack search 1 CD Multimedia External devices Select the or symbol QO Search Select the desired category e g Genre or Artist All entries are displayed in a list oS oS Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment gt Open A Z search and input the de sired entry When a letter is entered the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter If multiple letters are entered all results that contain that se quence are displayed gt Select the desired entry from the list GF USB audio JUKEBOX Browse directory Genre All genres All artists All composers All albums All tracks Start play 6 Select other categories if you wish Not all categories need to be selected For example if all of the tracks by a certain ar tist are to be displayed call up that artist only All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed 7 Start play Restarting a track search New search Playback lists Calling up playback lists 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Select the or amp symbol 4 JF Playlists Current playback List of tracks currently being played CD Multimedia External devices Select the or amp symbol dF Current playback op mM Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order CD Multimedia External devices Open Options a y
116. and bulb replace ment 250 Language changing on the Control Display 79 Lap and shoulder belt refer to Safety belts 48 Lashing eyes securing cargo 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference LATCH child restraint fixing system 55 Leather care 264 LEDs light emitting di odes 250 Length refer to Dimen sions 270 Letters and numbers enter ing 25 License plate lamp bulb re placement 255 Light alloy wheels care 265 Light emitting diodes LEDs 250 Lighter 119 Lighting Instruments 89 Lighting light and bulb re placement 250 Lighting vehicle refer to Lamps 85 Lights parking lamps low beams 85 Light switch 85 Limit refer to Speed limit 83 Load 137 Loading 136 Lock buttons doors refer to Locking 37 Locking from the inside 37 Locking from the outside 34 Locking setting the confirma tion signals 35 Locking the vehicle from the inside 37 Locking without remote con trol refer to Comfort Ac cess 39 Locks doors and win dows 57 Longlife oils alternative oil types 245 Longlife oils refer to Ap proved engine oils 245 Low beams 85 Low beams automatic 86 Low beams automatic refer to High beam Assistant 87 Low beams bulb replace ment 251 Lower back support refer to Lumbar support 47 Luggage rack rear luggage rack 138 Luggage rack refer to Roof mounted luggage rack 138 Lumbar support 47 M Mai
117. area 90 special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations 3 Side airbags 4 Knee airbag Head airbags In a lateral impact the head airbag supports the head Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Safety Controls Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion e g in less severe accidents or rear end collisions Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags gt Keep at a distance from the airbags gt Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim holding your hands at the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered gt There should be no people animals or ob jects between an airbag and a person gt Donotuse the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area gt Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear i e do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach holders or cables such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones gt Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly i e keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell otherwise
118. ate format 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Format 4 Select the desired format sce Date format dd mm yyyy mmiddiyyyy The date format is stored Settings on the Control Display Language Setting the language 1 Settings 2 Language Units 3 Language Language Units Deutsch Default 100 km Language Speech mode Consumption Distance km Temperature Pe 4 Select the desired language The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system refer to page 28 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays Brightness Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions However the ba sic setting can be adjusted 1 Settings 2 Control display 3 Brightness Y G Control display 4 Turnthe controller until the desired setting is selected 5 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Depending on the light conditions the bright ness control may not be clearly visible Service requirements mis 10000 12 2009 N SS The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition 80 The current service requirements can be read o
119. ated via iDrive The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Connectors for external devices gt Connection via USB audio interface Apple iPod iPhone USB devices e g MP3 play ers USB flash drives or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio inter face gt Connection via snap in adapter refer to page 207 when equipped with the music interface for smartphones Apple iPhone or mobile phones Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the analog AUX IN port Due to the large number of different audio de vices available on the market it cannot be en sured that every audio device mobile phone is operable on the vehicle Ask your service center about suitable audio devices mobile phones Audio files Standard audio files can be played back gt MPs WMA WAV PCM AAC M4A Playback lists M3U WPL PLS VV VV File system Standard file systems for USB devices are supported The FAT 32 format is recom mended 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Connecting A The USB audio interface is in the center con sole Connection of Apple iPod iPhone via USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable Connect the Apple iPod iPhone to the USB in terface The Apple iPod iPhone menu structure is sup ported by the USB audio interface Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interfa
120. ation and when driving in bends Activating DTC Press the button TRACTION is displayed in the instru ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Deactivating DTC Ep Press the button again TRACTION and the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster go out For better control The indicator lamp flashes DTC con 2P trols the drive forces and brake forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC and DTC has failed DTC activated amp The indicator lamp lights up and S TRACTION appears in the instrument cluster 7 gt i 032050 123 8 DTC is activated Performance Control Performance Control enhances the agility of your vehicle To enhance performance during sporty driving the rear wheel on the inside of the curve is braked while the resulting braking effect is largely compensated by engine inter vention xDrive xDrive is the all wheel drive system of your ve hicle The combined effects of xDrive and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driv ing characteristics The 4 wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axle depending on the driv ing situation and prevailing road conditions Hill Descent Control HDC The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep
121. ave better winter properties than summer tires XL Designation for specially reinforced tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 12 in 3 mm Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0 12 in 3 mm Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 16 in 4 mm Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm tires are less suitable for winter operation Minimum tread depth Wear indicators are distributed around the tire s circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage foreign objects lodged in the tread and tread wear Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces as well as debris curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels tires and suspension parts This is more likely to occur with low profile tires which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed especially if your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects gt Unusual vibrations during driving gt Unusual handling such as a strong ten dency to pull to t
122. better forward momentum brake intervention is performed in the manner of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin quickly even if DSC is deactivated Activating DSC r we Press the button a DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster go out For better control The indicator lamp flashes DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC and DTC has failed DSC deactivated amp The indicator lamp lights up and ee DSC OFF appears in the instrument cluster 4 gt OFF 3 032050 123 8 DSC and DTC deactivated 100 Dynamic Traction Control DTC The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions e g unp lowed snowy roads but driving stability is lim ited It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving in sand on snowy inclines in slush or on unplowed snow covered road surfaces gt When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in deep snow sand or on loose ground gt When driving with snow chains Deactivating activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground Driving stability is limited during acceler
123. capacity of the tires never overload the ve hicle Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure lt No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area otherwise the vehicle may be dam aged lt Determining the load limit 1 Locate the following statement on your ve hicle s placard 136 gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY Ibs Otherwise damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 000 Ibs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 Ibs 1 000 Ibs minus 600 Ibs 400 Ibs Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle Consult the manual for transport ing a trailer t
124. ce Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro tect the USB audio interface and the USB de vice against physical damage Connect the USB device to the USB interface After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks e g artist or type of music as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle This may take some time depending on the USB device and the number of tracks During transmission the tracks can be called up via the file directory Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx 36 000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36 000 tracks are stored information on existing tracks may be deleted 188 Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played Playback 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Select the or amp symbol GF External devices JUKEBOX v ft Handy a Gerat lt a AUX front The playback starts with the first track The CD cover belonging to the track may ap pear on the Control Display after several sec onds Track search Selection is possible via gt Playback lists gt Information type of music artist and if available composer album track gt Additionally for USB devices file directory composer Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet Starting the tr
125. center console An up date via the USB interface in the glove compartment is not possible 3 Settings 4 Software update 5 Update software amp Software update Software update for the support of external devices Show current version Update software Restore previous version 7 OK All listed software updates are installed Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary Settings Software update Restore previous version OK Double click All listed software updates are removed ye o 193 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restored BMW Assist Of fice functions and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again 194 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone Telephone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the sel
126. ch Turn signal in exterior mirror Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs refer to page 250 4 Disconnect the plug change the bulb and Contact your service center in the event of a reconnect the plug malfunction 5 Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops o Tail lights The tail lights consist of two parts One part is in the tailgate and the other is in the fender P21W bulbs 21 watt 6 Reattach the cover 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Replacing components On the right side take the button with the fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward the front if necessary 1 Backup light 2 Roadside parking light tail light LED 3 Brake light 7 4 Turnsignal 4 Squeeze the lower clips arrows 2 and take out the bulb holder 5 Inner brake light 5 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while Contact your service center in the event of a turning it to the left for removal and re faulty roadside parking lamp tail lamp placement i 6 Re engage the bulb holder so that it audi Lamps in the fender bly clicks into place All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder 7 Replace the cover 1 Switch off the lights and take the remote i i i control out of the ignition lock Inside brake lights in the tailgate 1 Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock 2 Press the cover out of the cargo area side panel at the rear and re
127. ck 59 Homepage 6 Hood 243 Hood opening 243 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 133 Hotline 223 House number entering for navigation 147 Hydraulic brake assistant 99 Hydroplaning 133 285 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Ice warning refer to External temperature warning 73 Icy roads refer to External temperature warning 73 Identification marks tires 237 Identification number refer to Engine compartment 242 iDrive 20 iDrive changing settings 79 iDrive changing the date and time 78 iDrive changing the lan guage 79 iDrive changing the units of measure and display for mat 77 iDrive setting the bright ness 80 Ignition 60 Ignition key position 1 refer to Radio ready state 59 Ignition key position 2 refer to Ignition on 60 Ignition key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Ignition lock 59 Ignition switched off 60 Ignition switched on 60 Indication of a flat tire 94 96 Indicator and warning lights 17 Individual settings refer to Personal Profile 32 Inflation pressure monitor re fer to Flat Tire Monitor 93 Inflation pressure refer to Tire inflation pressure 232 Information on the navigation data 144 Initialization after power fail ure 256 Initializing Refer to Setting the time and date 78 286 Initializing compass refer to Calibrating 118 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93 Initializing pan
128. conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 238 Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinfla tion or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure lt RSC Run flat tires The symbol identifying run flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall refer to page 241 M S Winter and all season tires These h
129. ction switched on The steering wheel is turned The vehicle begins to roll Automatic transmission the transmission position is changed from D to N R or M S gt Automatic transmission the transmission position is changed from P to N D R or M S gt Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on Vehicle battery charge is very low gt The interior has cooled down strongly with the heating switched on gt Low braking pressure such as from de pressing the brake pedal a number of times consecutively Preventing automatic engine stop with an automatic transmission The concept To permit the driver to drive away especially quickly such as at intersections the automatic engine stop can be actively prevented Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Preventing the engine stop using the brake pedal The engine stop can be actively prevented within one second after the vehicle comes to a standstill gt Depress the brake pedal briefly and force fully immediately after the vehicle comes to a standstill gt Then continue depressing the brake pedal with normal braking force Activating deactivating the system manually Oki Press the button gt LED lights up the Auto Start Stop function is deactivated The engine is started during an automatic engine stop The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start Stop button
130. d Operation takes place via the app Alternatively the functions can also be used via the ConnectedDrive Hotline The operating instructions for the My BMW Remote app can be found on the Connected Drive portal or at www bmw com 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information Refuel promptly At the latest refuel at a range below 30 miles 50 km otherwise the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur lt Notes Switch off the engine before refueling Always switch off the engine before refu eling otherwise fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed lt Observe when handling fuel gt Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel gt Donotcarry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident 228 Fuel cap Opening 1 Briefly pr
131. d Service CBS 247 Service interval display refer to Service requirements 80 Service requirements 80 Service requirements CBS Condition Based Serv ice 247 Services remote 225 Servotronic 102 Settings and information 76 Settings changing on the Control Display 79 Settings clock 12h 24h mode 78 Settings DVD 179 Settings language 79 Settings refer to Personal Profile 32 Shifting automatic transmis sion with Steptronic 68 71 Shift lever automatic trans mission with Steptronic 68 Shift paddles 71 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 69 Short commands voice acti vation 272 Side airbags 90 Side windows refer to Win dows 42 Sitting safely 46 Size refer to Dimensions 270 Ski bag refer to Ski and snowboard bag 124 Slide tilt glass roof refer to Panoramic glass sunroof 44 Slot for remote control 59 Smokers package refer to Ashtray 119 Snap in adapter mobile phone 207 Snap in adapter refer to Storage compartment of center armrest 126 Snow chains 241 Socket OBD Onboard Diag nosis 248 Socket refer to Connecting electrical devices 119 Software applications iPhone 224 Software part number 198 Software update 193 SOS refer to Emergency Re quest initiating 257 Spare fuse 256 Special destinations naviga tion 149 Special equipment series equipment 6 Speed average 75 Speed limit 83 Speed limit setting 84 Speedometer 16 Speed with winter tires 240 Split
132. d accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and convenience are described here Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Remote control key Buttons on the remote control 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening tailgate General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries charge status 32 In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access the remote control contains a replaceable battery refer to page 41 The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re mote control is used to unlock the vehicle re fer to Personal Profile In addition information about service require ments is stored in the remote control Service data in the remote con
133. d create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions Traffic conditions gray map active the setting is disregarded gt Satellite images Depending on availability and resolution satellite images are displayed at scales of approx 1 mile to 600 miles 2 km to 1 000 km gt Perspective view in 3D Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D gt Traffic conditions gray map The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins refer to page 160 Symbols for the Points of Interest are no longer displayed Map view for splitscreen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen 1 Open Options 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen is selected 4 Select Split screen content or the scale 5 Select the map view Arrow display Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position VV VV VV Exit ramp view selected blind drive ways are displayed three dimension ally gt Traffic conditions gray map 6 Tochange the scale select the split screen and turn the controller Traffic bulletins At a glance gt Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service Infor mation on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuo
134. d stresses on the vehicle components when towing al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit ting otherwise damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle lt Tow fitting The screw in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor cover and storage compartment in the cargo area refer to page 249 It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area refer to page 249 261 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Breakdown assistance Tow fitting information on use gt Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in gt Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only gt Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur lt Screw thread Press on the lower part of the cover The cover is pushed out at the top edge and can be pulled out Tow starting Note Do not tow start your vehicle Due to the automatic transmission the engine cannot be started by tow starting Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied 262 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Care Mobility Care
135. dditional telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated Activate the func tion gt Is an outgoing call not possible Connect the mobile phone as a telephone No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed or they are incom plete gt Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete gt Itis possible that only the phone book en tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted gt It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters gt The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high gt Is the data volume of the contact too large e g due to stored information such as notes Reduce the data volume of the con tact gt Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone The mo bile phone must be connected as a tele phone The phone connection quality is poor gt The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted depending on the mobile phone gt Insert the mobile phone into the snap in adapter or place it in the area of the center console gt Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately 202 If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available con tact Customer Relations or the service center Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is se
136. dental or consequential damages so those particular limitations may not apply to you gt The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols gt The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list AX The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulle tins that affect the calculated route Switching the reception on off 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Receive Traffic Info Opening the list of traffic bulletins 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 AX Traffic Info First traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle 4 Select a traffic bulletin More information display additional information 5 Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if required Traffic bulletins on the map Traffic conditions gray map active The Control Display changes to a black and white display This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins The day night mode is disre Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation garded in this setting Symbols and Points of Interest are not displayed Navigation Map Open Options Settings eS SPSS Traffic conditions gray map Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the rout
137. ditions are met gt The driver s door is opened while the en gine is running the safety belt is not fas tened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator is activated gt The engine is switched off unless N is en gaged and the remote control is in the igni tion lock gt The remote control is removed from the ig nition lock 70 Before leaving the vehicle ensure that the transmission position P is engaged otherwise the vehicle may begin to roll Engaging transmission position gt Transmission position P can only be disen gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed gt With the vehicle stationary press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shift lock Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start Engaging transmission positions D R Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if necessary When shifting out of P or into R simultane ously push the unlock button 1 The engaged transmission position is dis played on the selector lever After releasing the selector lever it returns to its center position Engaging transmission position P Select only when the vehicle is stationary Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052
138. downhill gradients Without requiring brake ap plication the vehicle moves at slightly more than twice walking speed You can activate the Hill Descent Control at speeds below approx 22 mph 35 km h When driving downhill at below approx 22 mph 35 km h the vehicle reduces its speed to approx twice walking speed and keeps it constant While you are actively braking the system is on standby The system does not brake the vehicle during this time Increasing or reducing speed The speed can be changed in the range from roughly twice walking speed to approx 15 mph 25 km h by pressing the accelerator or brake pedal lightly A target speed within the same range can be specified using the lever of the cruise control 1 Increasing speed 2 Decreasing speed 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems Activating HDC en Press the button the LED above the aa button lights up The LED flashes when the brakes are applied automatically Deactivating HDC Geom Press the button again the LED goes out HDC is automatically deactivated above approx 37 mph 60 km h Using HDC HDC can be used in every driving position Displays in the instrument cluster x7 rel Oa Se By de tA ee 20 14 Rov a 100 160 7 A i a h t ay 4 sw Oy 56 ETTE 5 60 2007 i ow oN A 3P 481 mis 032050 123 8 1 Display for
139. e 5 Press the controller Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 New route for 4 Remove blocking Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and if needed gas stations along the route are dis played Even with the latest navigation data informa tion on individual Points of Interest may have changed for example gas stations might not be in operation 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Recommended refuel A list of the gas stations is displayed 4 Highlight a gas station The location of the gas station is displayed on the split screen 5 Select the gas station 6 Select the symbol 7 Start guidance destination guidance to the selected gas station is started Add as another destination the gas sta tion is added to the route Destination guidance through voice instructions Switching spoken instructions on off Settings are stored for the remote control cur rently in use 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Q y Voice instructions Repeating a spoken instruction 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 y Highlight the symbol 4 Press the controller twice Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set Settings are stored for the remote control cur rently in use Saving the spoken instructions o
140. e and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed 2 Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way If the first starting attempt is not success ful wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge 3 Let both engines run for several minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables in the re verse order Check the battery and recharge if necessary Tow starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow starting and towing lt No additional passengers Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed lt 259 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Automatic transmission 8 gear transporting your vehicle Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed Therefore contact a service center in the event of a breakdown Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load ing platform only otherwise damage may oc cur lt Tow truck Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only Towing your vehicle Observe before towing your vehicle Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be
141. e the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale a traffic obstruc tion s length direction and impact are dis played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route gt Red traffic congestion Orange stop and go traffic Yellow heavy traffic Green clear roads VV V OV Gray general traffic bulletins such as road construction The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Open Options 4 Traffic Info categories 5 Select the desired category Gs Categories EY Traffic flow EY Roadwork O EY Closed roads J amp Traffic disruptions Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed on the map gt Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route are always shown gt For your own safety traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situa tions such as wrong way drivers cannot be hidden Destination guidance with traffic bulletins General information Detour suggestions from the navigation sys tem can be manually accepted when using semi dynamic destination guidance When us ing dynamic destination guidance they are au tomatically accepted for route guidance Semi dynamic destination guidance When traffic bull
142. e 34 via the remote control or the door lock Convenient closing refer to page 39 with Comfort Access Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Comfort position In the comfort position the roof is not fully Initialization after a power failure After a power failure it may only possible to tilt open This reduces wind noise in the passen the roof ger compartment Have the system initialized by your service Each time the glass sunroof is opened or center closed all the way it stops in the comfort posi tion If desired continue the motion following this with the switch After the ignition is switched off The roof can still be operated for approx 1 mi nute as long as no door has been opened Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value the closing move ment is stopped beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof or from the tilted position during closing The glass sunroof opens again slightly Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection Despite the pinch protection system check that the roof s closing path is clear otherwise the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations such as when thin objects are present lt Closing without the pinch protection system For example if there is an external danger pro ceed as follows 1 Press the switc
143. e contacts were stored on the mobile phone the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted My contacts Highlight the contact Open Options Pe NS Delete contact or Delete all contacts 220 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 ConnectedDrive Communication ConnectedDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations TeleService General information TeleService supports communication with your service center gt Data on the vehicle s service requirements can be sent directly to the service center In this way the service center can plan its work in advance This shortens the dura tion of the service appointment gt Inthe event of a breakdown data on the vehicle s condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance gt The service varies by country gt Connection costs may ensue Services may be restricted abroad Requirements
144. e control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage Before removing the remote control push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism gt The ignition is switched off if it was on Automatic transmission You can only take out the remote control if transmission position P is engaged interlock Pressing the Start Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start Stop button Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate The time and the external temperature are dis played in the instrument cluster Radio ready state is switched off automatically gt When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving gt In cars with Comfort Access refer to page 39 by touching the surface above the door lock Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate The od ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers Radio ready state and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis plays in the instrument cluster go out Automatic transmission 8 gear In certain situations transmission position P is engaged automatically To make it possible for the vehicle t
145. e emergency opera tion refer to Opening man ually 38 Tailgate opening from the in side 38 Tailgate opening from the outside 38 Tailgate opening man ually 38 Tailgate remote control 35 Tail lamp bulb replace ment 255 Tail lamps bulb replace ment 254 Tail lights 253 Tank gauge refer to Fuel gauge 4 Tasks 215 Technical changes refer to Safety 7 Technical data 270 Telephone 198 Telephone adjusting the vol ume 202 Telephone installation loca tion refer to Center arm rest 126 TeleService 221 Temperature automatic cli mate control 111 Temperature changing the unit of measure 77 Temperature coolant refer to Coolant temperature 74 Temperature display External temperature warn ing 73 Temperature display external temperature 73 Temperature display setting the units 77 Temperature engine oil 74 Temperature warning 73 Text messages 212 Theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 41 Thigh support adjustment 47 Third brake lamp refer to Center brake lamp 255 Tilt alarm sensor 42 Tilting the passenger side mirror 51 Time setting the time 77 Tire age 237 Tire identification marks 237 Tire inflation pressure 232 Tire inflation pressure check ing 232 Tire pressure monitor refer to Flat Tire Monitor 93 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95 Tire Quality Grading 238 Tires breaking in 132 Tires changing 239 Tires condition 238 Tires damage 239 Tire size 237
146. e or the button is pressed again Defrosting and defogging windows Press the button Ice and condensation are quickly re moved from the windshield and the front side windows For this purpose also switch on the cooling function Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running Press the button A C The air is cooled and dehumidified and depending on the temperature setting warmed again Depending on the weather the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program When using the automatic climate control condensation water refer to page 134 devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Climate Controls Rear window defroster Emi Press the button The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time Switching the system on off Switching off i Press and hold the left button or with the setting at the lowest level press the left button All displays are cleared except for the rear win dow defroster if it is switched on OFF When the automatic climate control is switched off the supply of outside air is sus pended If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over switch the system back on and increase the air flow rate Switching on Press any button except fo
147. e speed up into the red gt Cold engine the pointer is at the low tem warning field see arrow In this range the fuel perature end Drive at moderate engine supply is interrupted to protect the engine and vehicle speeds gt Normal operating temperature the pointer is in the middle or in the right half of the Coolant temperature temperature display Hot engine the pointer is at the high tem perature end Switch off the engine imme diately and allow it to cool down A warning lamp will come on if the coolant and therefore the engine becomes too hot In addi tion a message will appear on the Control Dis play If the engine oil temperature is too high a mes Check the coolant level refer to page 246 sage appears on the Control Display Check the oil level refer to page 243 Current fuel consumption Fuel gauge 50 30 20 kK UT a gt Displays the current fuel consumption You can check whether you are currently driving in The vehicle inclination may cause the display an efficient and environmentally friendly man to vary ner The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap Notes on refueling refer to page 228 Range After the reserve range is reached 74 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls gt Amessage is briefly displayed on the Con trol Display gt The remaining range is shown on the com puter gt W
148. e vehicle in which these technical data could Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Notes ss become associated with a specific person in combination with other information such as an accident report damage to the vehicle wit ness accounts etc possibly with the involve ment of an authorized expert Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer such as vehicle lo calization in the event of an emergency permit the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the vehicle Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as gt How various systems in your vehicle were operating gt Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened gt How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal gt How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
149. econds To switch off the alarm press any button Unlocking tailgate Press the button on the remote control for approx 1 second and release The tailgate will open slightly regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle do not place the remote control into the cargo area The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed Before and after each trip check that the tail gate has not been inadvertently unlocked Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Flash when lock unlock i Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock w Retrieving the seat and mirror settings The driver s seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur rently in use When the vehicle is being unlocked these po sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting is activated Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used first make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is empty Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat lt The adjustment procedure is interrupted gt W
150. ected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi cle via Bluetooth Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG Inc After these devices are paired once they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via iDrive the but tons on the steering wheel and via voice acti vation Depending on their functionality external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source The telephone functions are described in the following Operating the audio functions refer to page 189 Up to four external devices can be paired Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road conditions allow Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving use the hands free system instead If you do not ob 198 serve this precaution you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users lt Snap in adapter The snap in adapter is used to gt Hold the mobile phone gt Recharge the battery gt Connect the mobile phone t
151. ed on the side wall of the tire Run flat tires RSC label on the tire sidewall The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self supporting to a limited de gree The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss Driving with a damaged tire gt Flat Tire Monitor FTM refer to page 93 gt Tire Pressure Monitor TPM refer to page 95 Changing run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you Snow chains Only certain fine link snow chains have been tested by BMW classified as safe for use and recommended Consult your service center for more information Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only Observe the manufacturer s instructions when mounting snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h when using snow chains Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor if snow chains are mounted otherwise the instrument might issue an incorrect reading Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor if snow chains are mounted otherwise the instrument might is sue an incorrect reading When driving with snow chains it can be bene ficial to temporarily activate DTC refer to page 100 241 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Engi
152. eet 2 Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city If there are several streets with the same name 1 Change to the list of street names 2 Highlight the street 3 Select the street Alternative enter the street address and house number 1 Select Street or the displayed street 2 Enter the street as you would the town city House number Select the numbers Change to the list of house numbers of ot a Select a house number or range of house numbers Street does not exist in the destination city town The desired street does not exist in the speci fied city town because it belongs to another part of the city town 1 Navigation Enter address Select Street or the displayed street Change to the list of street names an a ie Select In with the state province cur rently displayed All streets of the selected state province are offered The associated town city is displayed after the street name BEVERLY HILLS CA Ce In In UNITED STATES MUSAUSSTRASSE MUSENBERGSTRASSE MUSEUMSINSEL MUSPELHEIMSTRASSE MUSPILLISTRASSE 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Select the letters Change to the list of street names Highlight the street Select the street Oo oND Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1 Accept destination 2 Start guidance or Add a
153. elay gt Check the e mail settings on the telephone and adjust if necessary If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available please contact the hotline or service center 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Contacts Contacts Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Note Equipment version without the mobile phone preparation package General information Contacts can be created and edited The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed New contact 1 Contacts 2 New contact I amp Contacts v New contact My contacts 218 3 The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries Delete input fields 4 Fillin the entry fields select the symbol next to the entry field w amp F New contact Delete input fields Store contact in vehicle fw La
154. elete music collection External devices At a glance AUX IN port USB audio interface Music interface for smartphones Ai S Bluetooth audio G AUX IN port Ata glance gt For connecting audio devices e g MP3 player The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers gt Recommendation use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device The tone depends on the quality of the audio files Connecting The AUX IN port is in the center console Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Connect the headphone connector or line out connector of the device to the AUX IN port Playback 1 Connect the audio device switch it on and select a track on the audio device 2 CD Multimedia 3 If necessary External devices 4 AUX front Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources it is advisable to adjust the volumes Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia 2 If necessary External devices 3 AUX front 4 Volume G AUX front AUX active Volume BPPRPe 5 Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller USB audio interface music interface for smartphones At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices They can be oper
155. emory buttons The required distance depends on the par ticular hand held transmitter 3 Press the memory button of the universal garage door opener 4 Ifthe LED flashes slowly after approx 20 seconds press the transmit button on the hand held transmitter 5 Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap prox 60 seconds change the distance and repeat the step Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Canada if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx 60 seconds change the dis tance and repeat the step If programming was aborted by the hand held transmitter hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand held transmitter several times for 2 seconds Controls Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal Garage Door Opener ensure that there are no people animals or objects in the range of movement of the system otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter lt The system such as the garage door can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror with the engine running or the igni tion switched on When you are within the re ception range of the system press and hold the button until the function is initiated The LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up continuously while t
156. emove the front cargo cover re fer to page 120 Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear brackets in the headliner to the point where they engage Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the way into the holders on both sides and slide forward Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re taining straps into the eyelets on the rear seat backrest arrow on both sides Lash the partition net tightly To do this tighten the retaining straps using the ten sioning buckles Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Installation behind the front seats 1 Fold down the rear seat backrests refer to Enlarging the cargo area 2 Fold open the cover caps of the front brackets in the headliner to the point where they engage 3 Insert the rods of the partition net all the way into the holders on both sides and slide forward 4 Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re taining straps into the upper eyelets on the rear seat backrest on both sides 5 Lash the partition net tightly To do this tighten the retaining straps using the ten sioning buckles Removing To remove and stow the partition net proceed in reverse order To fold up press both release buttons arrows Cargo floor panel Compartment in floor Note the maximum permissible load Do not exceed a maximum load of 55 Ibs 25 kg in the storage compartment be neath the cargo floor panel other
157. en the washer fluid reservoir is empty otherwise you will damage the washer pump lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Washer fluid General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injuries if used improperly Therefore keep it away from sources of igni tion Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer United States The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U S EPA and many individual states do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer Use BMW s Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts Otherwise there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled lt All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir The recommended minimum filling quantity is 0 2 US gal 1 liter Fill with a mixture of window washing concen trate and tap water if needed add antifreeze according to the manufacturer instructions Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio Do not fill in undiluted wi
158. ent cluster Deactivating ECO PRO The bonus range is indicated in the range dis play ECO Press the button again The bonus range is automatically reset after The LED above the button and the ECO PRO display in the instrument cluster go refueling out Driving style ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current driving style in the instrument cluster gt ECO PRO not highlighted efficient driving style gt ECO PRO highlighted adjust your driving style for example by accelerating less quickly To drive efficiently gt Accelerate less quickly gt Brake in advance gt Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of 80 mph 130 km h gt Automatic transmission shift from S to D or avoid shifting manually ECO PRO tip Situation related tips that indicate measures to achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis played A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO speed of 80 mph 130 km h is exceeded Displaying the ECO PRO tip 1 Vehicle Info 2 ECO PRO Tips ECO PRO climate control Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel economy 141 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Navigation system Navigation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found
159. er 21 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 At a glance anu Ite in the ner s Manu In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g Settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected e g Radio a new panel is displayed Panels can overlap gt Move the controller to the left The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button In this case the current panel is not closed gt Move the controller to the right A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display Q Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96 3 KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened View of an opened menu When a menu is opened it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu To display the first panel of a menu gt Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed gt Press the menu button on the controller twice Opening the Options menu mm Press the button The Options menu is displayed 22 QF Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Bayern Po Store station Additional options move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed The Options menu consists
160. er wise it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disc lt Sx Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry stand ard in music recognition technology and re lated content delivery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 Gracenote up to now Gracenote Software Copyright 2000 Gracenote up to now This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some serv ices supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia Storing from a CD DVD 1 Insert a CD or DVD into the CD DVD player 2 CD Multimedia 3 CD DVD 4 Select the symbol for the CD DVD player 5 Store in vehicle GF Audio CD 00 25 FQ Store in vehicle Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD DVD is played back During the storage process the tracks are played in se quence Observe the following during the storage proc ess Do not switch to the CD DVD player and do not remove the CD DVD from the CD DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process You can switch to
161. er s Manual These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials con tained in that document 1 Where the terms service center the ser vice center your service center service specialist or service are used in the Owner s Manual we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications Where the text of the Owner s Manual con tains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center we wanted to clarify that BMW recom mends that if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text you con tact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accor dance with BMW specifications While BMW of North America LLC at no cost to you will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the appli cable warranty and maintenance coverage periods you are free to elect both during those periods and thereafter to have main tenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops Where the Owner
162. er the heading Carpets and floor mats the paragraph that begins Only use floor mats should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place At page 140 under the heading Have maintenance carried out the sentence beginning Have the maintenance carried out should be disregarded and the fol lowing text should be read in lieu thereof Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Addendum 10 TL 12 13 BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center At page 225 under the heading Apps and subheading Requirements the section that begins Use only should be disre garded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of BMW recommended software otherwise there may be malfunctions in system operations At page 232 under the heading Pressure specifications the sentence beginning The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved should be disregarded At page 240 under the heading Approved wheels and tires the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the term Recommended should be
163. er use while driving otherwise injury may oc cur during accidents Closing Fold up the cover USB interface for data transfer 7 hA A er F S j Port for importing and exporting data such as music collections refer to page 181 on USB devices Observe the following when connecting 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Storage compartments gt Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface Do not connect a USB hard drive gt Donot use the USB interface to recharge external devices Center armrest front Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains a compartment with cupholders or the cover for the snap in adapter depending on the version Details on this mobile phone cradle refer to page 207 Opening Pull the center armrest upward 126 Adjusting tion Center armrest rear Pull the center armrest forward at the strap When folding up push the center armrest firmly back into the rear seat backrest Connection for an external audio device This can be used to connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player gt AUX IN port refer to page 186 gt USB audio interface refer to page 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Storage compartments Contr
164. eration Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Using the door lock General information Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge lt The alarm system refer to page 41 is not deployed when the vehicle is locked with the integrated key The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened if the vehicle was un locked via the door lock To stop the alarm unlock the vehicle with the remote control or insert the remote control into the ignition lock all the way Only the driver s door can be locked via the door lock Locking the doors the fuel filler flap and the tailgate all at once To lock all doors the fuel filler flap and the tail gate at once 1 With the doors closed lock the vehicle us ing the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior refer to page 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls 2 Unlock and open the driver s or front pas senger door refer to page 37 3 Lock the vehicle as follows gt Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside gt Lock the driver s door using the integrated key in the door lock Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs unlock o
165. ess the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is played back Bruce Springsteen Magic 00 28 FA Store in vehicle Nowhere Youll Be Comin Down Livin In The Future Select the desired track to begin playback CDs DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data some letters and num bers of the CD DVD may not be displayed cor rectly 1 Select the directory if necessary To change to a higher level directory move the controller to the left Santana Supernatural 00 38 Prince Santana Sportfreunde Stiller Tom Jones 2 Select the desired track to begin playback Santana Supernatural 00 08 B Store in vehicle Da Le Yaleo Africa Bamba Corazon Espinado Fe Santana Supernatural 223 249 00 35 Prince O Santana O Sportfreunde Stiller E l Tom Jones 6 If information about a track has been stored it is displayed automatically gt Artist gt Album track gt Number of tracks on the CD DVD gt File name of track 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired CD or DVD 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ CD multimedia 4 Open Options 5 Random J Options EY Split screen Switch off control display p CD Multimedia UR 0 oO Random Music data import export CDs DVDs with compressed audio files all tracks within the selec
166. ess the rear edge of the fuel filler flap a 2 Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise 3 Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap Closing 1 Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you Clearly hear a click 2 Close the fuel filler flap Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Refueling Manually unlocking fuel filler flap Fuel tank capacity In the event of a malfunction the fuel filler flap can be released manually Fuel tank capacity approx 16 6 US gal 63 liters 1 Press the cover out of the cargo area side panel at the rear and remove it 2 Take the button with the fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward the front and pull This releases the fuel filler flap Observe the following when refueling When refueling insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes gt Premature pump shutoff gt Reduced efficiency in the fuel vapor recov ery system The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank otherwise escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle l
167. etin reception is switched on semi dynamic destination guidance is active The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account A mes sage is displayed depending on the route the traffic bulletins and the possible detour routes If possible a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions The upper part of the message shows gt Symbol of the first traffic obstruction pos sibly with the distance to the beginning of the obstruction 161 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 EW eF 1ielamm Destination guidance gt Total length of the traffic obstructions on Activating dynamic destination guidance the route 1 Navigation gt Time by which the trip is extended due to 2 Open Options the traffic obstructions 3 Dynamic guidance The lower part of the message shows gt Detour recommendation with the distance to the beginning of the detour gt Difference between the length of the new route compared to the original route gt Time gained if the detour is taken com pared to the original route with the traffic obstructions Both the original route shown in white and the detour are displayed on the split screen Accepting the detour Detour In the event of special hazards e g objects on the road a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion Detours can also be accepted if the traffic messages are called up in the list 1
168. ever 2 Lift the hood all the way 3 Press the release handle and open the hood Closing the hood Drop the hood from a height of ap prox 16 in 40 cm It must be clearly heard to engage Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving pull over im mediately and close it securely lt Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Engine oil General information Engine oil consumption depends on the driv ing style and the conditions of use A highly sporty driving style for example results in considerably higher engine oil consumption Therefore regularly check the engine oil level after refueling Depending on the engine the vehicle uses electronic oil measurement or dip stick meas urement Checking the engine oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic engine oil level check 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Engine compartment Requirements gt The engine must be running and warm af ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 2 miles 10 km gt The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway Display in the instrument cluster 1 Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the ap propriate symbol appears in the display accompanied by the word OIL 2 Press button 2
169. evices can be paired with the vehicle Requirements gt The device is suitable Details can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth The device is ready for operation The ignition is switched on Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle refer to page 199 Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle Bluetooth presettings must be made on the device such as for a connection with out confirmation or visibility refer to the device operating instructions A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth passkey It is only required once for pairing Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle s occupants and to other road users only pair the device while the vehicle is station ary lt a i Ph oS CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio If necessary Bluetooth audio Add new phone 190 The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played GF Bluetooth audio Add new p one Connected ae Handy 1 7 I Paired Gerat 1 Perform additional steps on the device re fer to the device operating instructions for instance search for or connect the Blue tooth device or a new device The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display You are prompted by the iDrive or device to enter the same Bluetoo
170. exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center position gt If the middle safety belt is used in the rear the left backrest must be locked refer to page 121 otherwise the safety belt will not have a restraining effect Notes One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger s lap lt Putting on the belt Lay the belt without twisting snugly across the lap and shoulders as close to the body as possible Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Adjusting Controls The safety belt must not lie across the neck rub on sharp edges be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap otherwise the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced lt Buckling the belt Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle Unbuckling the belt 1 Hold the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the belt buckle 3 Guide the belt back into its reel Safety belt reminder for the drive
171. ext message out loud Read the text message out loud refer to page 216 My Info Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected Sym Function bol amp Start guidance or Add as another destination D Call If the message contains a number the connection is established Ol Select phone number If the message contains more than one number select the desired number from the list The connec tion is established Message from the Concierge service Storing an address 1 Select the desired message 2 Open Options 3 Store contact in vehicle Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected Sym Function bol amp Start guidance or Add as another destination D Call If the message contains a number the connection is established 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Office Ol Select phone number If the message contains more than one number select the desired number from the list The connec tion is established i Further information Display additional information E mail Displaying e mails 1 Office 2 Messages 3 Select the desired e mail Displaying e mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e mail are transmitted by the mobile phone this informa tion is displayed in the e mail amp 4 Sender Recipient
172. ey are frozen onto the windshield otherwise the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Do not use the wipers on a dry wind shield Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield oth erwise the wiper blades may wear more rap idly or become damaged lt At a glance 1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 3 Activating deactivating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor 4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen sitivity of the rain sensor Switching on wipers Press the wiper lever upward arrow 1 The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released Normal wiper speed Press up once The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary Fast wiper speed Press up twice or press once beyond the re sistance point The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the wiper lever down arrow 2 The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released gt Brief wipe press down once gt To switch off normal wipe press down once gt To switch off fast wipe press down twice Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor the intermittent wipe time is a preset If the
173. fied Set the language refer to page 79 Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system if Gs Press the button on the steering wheel 2 Wait for the signal 3 Say the command The command appears on the Control Dis play wt The symbol on the Control Display indi cates that the voice activation system is active If no other commands are available operate the function via iDrive in this case Terminating the voice activation system _ Gs Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play The functions of the main menu have short commands Some list items such as the phone book en tries can also be selected via the voice activa tion system Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read possible com mands aloud Voice commands 2 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance Emelrlae mm Voice activation system For example if the Settings menu is dis played the commands for the settings are read out loud Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands usually irrespective of
174. first destination If the second destination for example is highlighted when destination guidance is started the first destination is skipped 2 Start guidance This symbol marks the active leg of the trip Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list If necessary delete existing trips to be able to store new trips 1 Open Options 2 Store trip 3 Enteraname for the trip 4 OK Selecting a stored trip 1 Navigation 2 Stored trips 3 Select a stored trip 4 Start guidance 153 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list Map Guidance Open Options ey eS Reverse order of trip dest Intermediate destination options 1 Map 2 Guidance 3 Display all trip destinations 4 Select an intermediate destination gt Edit destination gt Reposition dest in the trip move an intermediate destination to another po sition in the list gt Delete dest in the trip gt Go to next dest in the trip Some options are not available for certain trips Deleting a stored trip 1 Navigation Stored trips Highlight the desired trip Open Options ae fe Delete all trios or Delete trip Opening the last trip 1 Navigation 2 Stored trips 3 Last trip 4 Start guidance
175. g displays 266 Cleaning your BMW refer to Care 263 Clock 73 Clock 12h 24h format 78 Clock setting the time and date 78 Clock setting the time zone 78 Closing from the inside 37 Closing from the outside 34 Clothes hooks 127 Cockpit 14 Cold start refer to Starting the engine 60 Combination instrument refer to Instrument cluster 16 Combination switch refer to Turn signal high beams headlamp flasher 64 Combination switch refer to Washer wiper system 64 Comfort Access 39 Comfort Access battery re placement 41 Comfort area refer to Around the center console 18 Compact wheel inflation pressure 232 Compartment for remote control refer to Ignition lock 59 Compartment in floor 123 Compartments refer to Stor age compartments 125 Compass digital 117 Computer 75 Computer displaying infor mation 75 Computer displays on the Control Display 76 Concierge service 221 Condensation under the vehi cle 134 Condition Based Service CBS 247 Confirmation signals 35 Connecting mobile phone refer to Pairing the mobile phone 199 Consumption refer to Aver age fuel consumption 75 Contacts 210 Control Display 20 Control Display care 266 Control Display settings 79 Controller 21 Controls and displays 14 Control systems driving sta bility 99 Convenient operation glass sunroof 34 Convenient operation win dow 34 Coolant 246 Coolant checking the level 246 Coolant tempera
176. g distance during full brak ing This system utilizes all of the benefits pro vided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking Dynamic Stability Control DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions such as fishtailing or nose diving Sub ject to physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver The laws of physics cannot be repealed even with DSC Do not reduce the additional safety margin with a risky driving style as otherwise there is a risk of an accident lt Deactivating DSC DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Deactivating DSC 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems r we Press and hold the button but not lon lt lt ger than approx 10 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti vated together In the interest of
177. g in the engine Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately otherwise serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components in particular the catalytic converter Display of the previously described malfunctions on Canadian models Fuel cap ae The indicator lamp lights up GASCAP i If the fuel cap is not properly tight ened the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping If the cap is then tightened the display should go out in a short time Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Replacing components Mobility Replacing components Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Tool kit The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel and storage compartment in the cargo area Wiper blade replacement Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed this may damage the windshield Front 1 To change the wiper blades fold up the wiper arms
178. g passengers ride in the rear engage the seat backrests locking them in place Otherwise there is the danger of an ac cident due to unexpected seat movement lt Partition net Firmly attach the partition net Make sure that the partition net is firmly attached otherwise injuries may result 121 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Interior equipment The partition net can be attached behind the Before installing 1 Remove the pouch with the partition net 9 from the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel in the cargo area 2 Take the partition net out of the pouch un 3 roll it and unfold it After use fold and roll up the partition net in the same manner and place it in the pouch so that it can be stowed back under the cargo floor panel Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles do not rest on the rod elements 3 Unfold the partition net to the point where the rod elements engage Mounting eyes Four mounting eyes are located on the back of 4 the rear seat backrests gt Installation behind the front seats ar a rows 1 5 gt Installation behind the rear seats arrows 2 Label Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi tioned i e do not reverse front and back The partition net is labeled accordingly 122 Installation behind the rear seats front or rear seats 1 If necessary tilt the rear seat backrests for ward and r
179. ges refer to Check Control 82 Warning signal volumes 167 Warning triangle 258 Washer wiper system 64 Washer wiper system rain sensor 65 Washer wiper system washer fluid 67 Washer wiper system wind shield washer nozzles 66 Washer fluid 67 Washer fluid reservoir 67 Washing vehicle 263 Waste tray refer to Ash tray 119 Water on roads refer to Driv ing through water 133 Weights 270 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Welcome lights 85 Wheelbase refer to Dimen sions 270 Wheel change 255 Wheels and tires 232 Wheels changing 239 Wheels Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93 Wheels Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 95 Width refer to Dimen sions 270 Window convenient opera tion 34 Windows 42 Windows defrosting and de fogging automatic climate control 112 Windows pinch protec tion 43 Windows safety switch 43 Windshield cleaning 66 Windshield defrosting refer to Defrosting windows 112 Windshield wash 64 Windshield washer fluid 67 Windshield wash rear win dow 66 Windshield wash reservoir for washer fluid 67 Windshield wash washer fluid 67 Windshield wash washer nozzles 66 Windshield wiper blades changing 249 Windshield wiper refer to Washer wiper system 64 Winter storage care 266 Winter tires setting the speed limit 84 Winter tires suitable tires 240 Winter tires tread 239 Wiper blades changing 249 Wiper fl
180. ggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured lt Ski and snowboard bag General information The ski and snowboard bag is contained ina protective jacket in the cargo area Follow the installation and operation instruc tions included in the protective jacket 124 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartments Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them other wise they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma neuvers lt No non slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non slip materials such as non slip mats on the dashboard or it could be damaged by the substances in the materials lt Glove compartment Opening Pull the handle The light in the glove compartment switches on Close the glove compartment again im mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af t
181. ghts without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active Symbol Function or system gt Turn signals refer to page 64 High beams headlamp flasher refer to page 87 Cockpit PAE RelEliter Symbol Function or system ND S w D gt x m o m D sS O m ENGINE lt Front fog lamps refer to page 88 Lamp flashes DSC or DTC is regulating the pro pulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability refer to page 99 The parking brake is set refer to page 63 Canada the parking brake is set re fer to page 63 Engine malfunction with adverse ef fect on emissions refer to page 248 Canada engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emis sions refer to page 248 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance Eells Cockpit All around the center console 7 ee Headliner 19 Deactivate the Automatic Engine Central locking system 37 1 2 Control Display 20 A or Start Stop Function 61 3 Airvent 113 DSC Dynamic Stability Con 4 Hazard warning system 257 For trol 99 A DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 100 ECO ECO PRO 140 PRO 9 Selector lever with automatic transmis sion 67 10 Controller with buttons 20 5 Automatic climate control 110 Glove compartment 125 7 Radio and CD DVD drive 168 Programmable memory buttons 24 P yj PDC Park Distance Control 105 A rearview camera 107
182. h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset Reset the system Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions For a vehicle containing an average load the possible driving distance is ap prox 50 miles 80 km When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire its handling characteristics change e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Adjust your driving style accord Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Safety Controls ingly Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed road conditions external temperature cargo load etc Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering properties Final
183. h forward beyond the re sistance point and hold Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value 2 Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed fatigue free driving The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with gt Safety belts refer to page 48 gt Head restraints refer to page 49 gt Airbags refer to page 90 Seats Note before adjusting Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver s seat while driving The seat could respond with un expected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident lt Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest on
184. h mirrors Height Length Wheelbase Smallest turning circle dia Smallest turning circle dia with all wheel drive Weights BMW X1 Approved gross vehicle lbs kg weight Load los kg Approved front axle load lbs kg 270 inches mm 70 8 1 798 inches mm 81 0 2 058 inches mm 60 8 1 545 inches mm 176 5 4 484 inches mm 108 7 2 760 fiim Sit leo ftim 38 7 11 8 X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i 4 497 2 040 4 707 2 135 4 861 2 205 904 410 904 410 904 410 2 116 960 2 326 1 055 2 425 1 100 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Technical data Reference Approved rear axle load lbs kg 2 546 1 155 2 590 1 175 2 646 1 200 Approved roof load ca lbs kg 165 75 165 75 165 75 pacity Cargo area capacity cu ft liter 25 0 56 0 420 25 0 56 0 420 25 0 56 0 420 1 350 1 350 1 350 Capacities Fuel tank US gal liters Approx 16 6 63 Fuel specifications refer to page 230 271 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Short commands for voice activation system Short commands for voice activation system Vehicle equipment General information This chapter describes all series equipment as Instructions for voice activation system refer well as country specific and special equipment to page 27 offered for this model series Therefore it also To have the available spoken instructions read describes equipment that may not be found in out loud Voice commands your vehicle for i
185. he automatic climate control The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power Automatic recirculated air mode recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle ex Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode gt LEDs off outside air flows in continuously gt Left LED on automatic recirculated air control a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto matically gt Right LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked If the windows are fogged over switch off the recirculated air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield 112 Via the button on the steering wheel A button on the steering wheel can be used to quickly switch between recirculated air mode and the previous setting ALL program ALL Press the button The current temperature setting for the driver s side is transferred to the front pas senger side If the temperature setting is changed on the driver s side the temperature on the front pas senger side changes as well The program is switched off if the setting is changed on the front passenger sid
186. he engine running or the ignition switched on shift the selector lever into posi tion R The image of the rear view camera is displayed when the system has been switched on using iDrive Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually Ez Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out If PDC is displayed switch on the backup cam era via the iDrive refer to page 106 Assistance functions Functional requirement gt Rear view camera is switched on gt Tailgate is completely closed 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls 1 Position the vehicle so that the turning lines lead into the margins of the parking space gt Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera when the transmission is in reverse gt Help estimate the required amount of space when parking and maneuvering ona 2 Turnthe steering wheel to the point where flat road surface the pathway line covers the corresponding gt Depend on the current steering angle and turning circle line are continuously adapted to movements of the steering wheel Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive refer to page 109 eA SSS a N gt Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera gt Show the path of the
187. he left or right Damage can be caused by driving over curbs road damage and similar situations In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage re duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away other wise there is the increased risk of an accident Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop If necessary have the vehicle towed Otherwise tire damage can present a life threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users Repair of tire damage For safety reasons the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired they should be re placed Otherwise damage can occur as a re sult lt Changing wheels and tires Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center or tire specialist If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Wheel and tire combination Information on the right wheel and tire combi nation and rim version for your vehicle can be obtained from the service center 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a
188. he pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached Should corrosion form on the brake discs the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle Therefore traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal Driving on poor roads BMW X1 combines an all wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car Do not drive on unpaved terrain Do not drive on unpaved terrain as oth erwise the vehicle may be damaged For your own Safety and the safety of passen gers and the vehicle adhere to the following points gt Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving never take risks gt Adjust speeds according to road condi tions The steeper and rougher the road surface is the lower the speed should be gt When driving on steep uphill and downhill grades the engine oil and coolant should be filled nearly to the MAX mark Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Things to remember when driving Drivingtips tips gt Use Hill Descent Control HDC refer to page 101 on steep downhill grades gt Watch for stones holes and other obsta cles and drive around these where possi ble gt On bumps and rough roads avoid contact between the vehicle body and the ground
189. he radio signal is being transmitted Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly All stored functions are deleted The functions cannot be deleted individually Digital compass 1 Adjustment button 2 Display The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen The following adjustment op tions are displayed one after the other de pending on how long the adjustment button is pressed gt Press briefly switch the display on off gt 3 to 6 seconds set the compass zone gt 6 to 9 seconds calibrate the compass gt 9 to 12 seconds set left hand right hand steering gt 12 to 15 seconds set the language Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to the vehicle s geographic location so that the com pass can function correctly refer to the world map with compass zones 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Interior equipment Tigh i NS i B HTN A gt ous Press the adjustment button for 3 4 seconds 2 Set the currently valid compass zone The number of the compass zone set is shown 3 Press the adjustment button for 6 7 sec in the display onds to call up C
190. hen a dynamic driving style is used such as when corners are taken rapidly engine functions are not ensured The message appears continuously below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km Refuel promptly At the latest refuel at a range below 30 miles 50 km otherwise the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur lt Computer Displaying information on the instrument panel R en Ta Press the computer button on the turn signal lever Information is displayed in the instrument clus ter Overview of the information Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever displays the information on the in strument cluster in the following order gt Range gt ECO PRO bonus range gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption gt Current fuel consumption gt No information To set the corresponding units of measure re fer to page 77 Information in detail Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 18 miles 30 km Average speed Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not included in the average speed calculations With the trip computer refer to page 76 you can have the average speed displayed for an additional distance To reset the average speed press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx 2 sec onds
191. hen a seat position switch is pressed gt When a button of the seat and mirror mem ory is pressed Selecting automatic activation 1 Settings 2 Door locks 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing 3 Last seat position auto Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock Malfunctions Local radio waves may interfere with the re mote control In this case unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key If the car can no longer be locked with a re mote control the battery in the remote control is discharged Use the remote control during an extended drive in order to recharge the bat tery refer to page 32 The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that may need to be replaced refer to page 41 For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and 36 gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op
192. id draining the battery all lights inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off Start Stop button refer to page 59 Switching the interior lights on and off Press the button To switch off permanently press the button for approx 3 seconds To clear this setting briefly press the button Reading lights Press the button Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights Danger of burns Do not reach into the opening of the lamps otherwise there is a risk of burns lt Ambient lighting Depending on the equipment the interior light ing can be set individually for some lights Selecting the color scheme 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Ambient 4 Select the desired setting 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Safety Safety Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected Airbags 1 Front airbags 2 Head airbags Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint Side airbags In a lateral impact the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap
193. ight place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle otherwise they could endanger them selves and other persons e g by opening the doors lt Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat Transporting children in the rear Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in the rear only using child restraint fixing sys tems suitable for the age weight and height of the child otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used due to their age weight and size 54 Children on the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat make sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Auto matic deactivation of front passenger airbags refer to page 91 Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat the front passenger airbags must be deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered even with a child re straint fixing system Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes Manufacturer s informat
194. ile communication devi ces in the vehicle 133 Mobile phone installation lo cation refer to Center arm rest 126 Mobile phone refer to Tele phone 198 Modifications technical refer to Safety 7 287 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Monitor refer to Control Dis play 20 Mounting of child restraint fix ing systems 54 MP3 player 186 Multimedia 176 Music collection 181 Music search 183 Music storing 181 N Navigation 144 Navigation data 144 Navigation data updat ing 144 Navigation system destina tion entry by voice 152 Neck restraints refer to Head restraints 49 Nets refer to Storage com partments 127 Neutral cleaner care 265 New wheels and tires 239 Notes 6 215 Nozzles refer to Ventila tion 113 O OBD Onboard Diagnos tics 248 OBD socket refer to Socket for OBD Onboard Diagno sis 248 Octane number refer to Fuel quality 230 Octane rating refer to Rec ommended fuel grade 230 Odometer 73 Office 209 Oil additives 245 Oil consumption 243 Oil refer to Engine oil 243 Oil types alternative 245 Oil types approved 245 288 Old batteries disposal 256 Onboard Diagnostics OBD 248 Onboard monitor refer to Control Display 20 Onboard vehicle tool kit 249 Opening and closing Comfort Access 39 Opening and closing from the inside 37 Opening and closing from the outside 34 Opening and closing using
195. ime and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Engine stop General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot operate the windows and injure themselves Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking oth erwise the vehicle may roll On steep upward and downward inclines further secure the ve hicle for example by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb lt Before driving into a car wash To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an automatic car wash follow the information on Washing in automatic car washes refer to page 263 Switching off the engine Automatic transmission 1 Engage transmission position P with the vehicle stopped 2 Press the Start Stop button 3 Set the parking brake firmly 4 Remove the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 59 Automatic Engine Start Stop Function The concept The Auto Start Stop function helps save fuel The system switches off the engine during a stop for instance in congestion or at traffic lights The ignition remains switched on The engine starts automatically when you wish to drive away Automatic operation The automatic engine Start Stop function is operational after
196. in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors and can reliably guide you to every entered destination Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger lt Opening the navigation system iid Press the button on the controller 1 2 Navigation The navigation system can also be called up directly using the button on the con troller NAV 144 Navigation data Information on navigation data 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Navigation system version Information is displayed on the data ver sion Updating the navigation data General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated Current navigation data and the authorization code are available from your service center gt Depending
197. ine toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada Defect Investigations and Recalls may tele Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 _ Notes phone the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www tc gc ca roadsafety 10 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Notes PO 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 ae Vehicle ec quipm lent special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations 4 m am 1 Safety switch for rear power win 2 Automatic headlight con Z A dows A trol 2 Power windows 4 Adaptive Light Control 3 Exterior mirror operation High beam Assistant
198. ion The following functions are available gt Use of a mobile phone as a telephone gt Use of a mobile phone as an additional te lephone Use of a mobile phone as an audio source Use of an audio device as an audio source refer to page 189 Requirements gt The mobile phone is suitable refer to page 198 The mobile phone is ready for operation gt Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone gt Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone e g for a con nection without confirmation or visibility refer to the mobile phone operating in structions gt Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey It is only required once for pairing gt The ignition is switched on Activating deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere 1 Telephone 2 Open Options 3 Bluetooth ASS Options Bluetooth telephone O Bluetooth audio LY Office Telephone EY Bluetooth Bluetooth info O Additional telephone Additional functions Activating deactivating the additional functions Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle Information on suit able mobile phones refer to page 198 that support this function Telephone Bluetooth phone Open Options Configure Bluetooth Select the desired additi
199. ion for child re straint fixing systems To select mount and use child restraint fixing systems observe the information provided by the system manufacturer otherwise the pro tective effect can be impaired On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat ensure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat the front passenger airbags must be deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered even with a child re straint fixing system lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Transporting children safely Controls Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident Do not change the seat position and height af ter this Backrest width Before mounting a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat open the backrest width refer to page 48 completely Do not change the backrest width after this Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front
200. ion potential until after an initial breaking in period Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of ap prox 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs Drive cautiously during this break in period Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle s operating life General driving notes Closing tailgate Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed other wise passengers and other road users may be endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an accident occurs or during braking or evasive maneuvers In addition exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment lt If despite this the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open gt Drive moderately gt Close all windows and the panoramic glass sunroof gt Greatly increase the blower speed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Things to remember when driving Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them Make sure that flammable materials e g hay leaves grass etc do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving while in idle
201. ions route usability or speed C The licensed material is provided to li censee as is and where is Total Traf fic Network including but not limited to any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material expressly disclaims to the fullest extent permitted by law all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material including without limitation that the licensed material will be error free will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate ex press implied or statutory including with out limitation the implied warranties of merchantability non infringement fitness for a particular purpose or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade D Neither Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in direct special consequential exemplary or incidental damages including without limitation lost revenues anticipated reve nues or profits relating to the same arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data and even if Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages These limitations apply to all claims in cluding without limitation claims in con 160 Navigation Destination guidance tract and tort such as negligence product liability and strict liability Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci
202. is model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx 20 mph 30 km h The speed specified using the lever on the steering column is maintained The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient Do not use cruise control Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed for instance gt On curvy roads gt In heavy traffic gt On slippery roads in fog snow or rain or on a loose road surface Otherwise you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident lt One lever for all functions 1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler ating 2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler ating 3 Deactivating cruise control 4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand Maintaining current speed Push arrow 1 or pull arrow 2 the lever to the resistance point The car s current speed is stored and main tained It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster On uphill gradients it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power outp
203. isplay All wheels are yellow gt Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires gt The system was not reset after a wheel change and issues warnings when the tire pressure deviates from the tire inflation pressures stored last gt A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem Is being reset A message appears on the Control Display The wheels are gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Possible reasons for this gt TPM is being reset gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency gt Malfunction Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures It shows the actual values read they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Safety Resetting the system Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla tion pressure and every time a tire or wheel is changed Vehicle Info Vehicle status Reset Start the engine but do not start driving Start the system reset with Reset NS YS Drive away The tires are shown in gray and Resetting TPM is displayed After a short trip at over 30 km h the set tire inflation pressures are adopted as target val ues The system reset is completed as you drive and can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes the reset is continued automatically On
204. isten to enabled channels The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use ia the iDrive 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Select All channels or the desired cate gory 4 Select the desired channel WE satellite radio i Q Snow Patrol A Chasing Cars All channels koa 001 Sirius Hits 1 jf v 002 Starlite J 003 Sirius Love Movin EZ Press the button The next channel is selected 171 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment Entertainment _ Radio Via direct channel entry 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 c Set channel 4 Turn the controller until the desired chan nel is reached and press the controller Storing a channel 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 5 Press the controller again 6 Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel M Store Store in presets 001 Sirius Hits 1 Store in favorites The Fray Over My Head Cable 7 Select the desired memory location The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym bol on the navigation bar is pressed Information on the channel is displayed EA Channel name EA Artist mn
205. isture away from the unit Otherwise they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials otherwise damage can result Long term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months 266 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Care Mobility 267 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 Reference This chapter contains technical data short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle equipment Note This chapter describes all series equipment as The technical data and specifications in the well as country specific and special equipment Owner s Manual serve as guidelines Detailed offered for this model series Therefore it also values can be obtained from your registration describes equipment that may not be found in documents from labels in your vehicle or from your vehicle for instance due to the selected the service center special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Dimensions BMW X1 Width without mirrors Width wit
206. it service life and have a negative impact on road safety lt Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below 45 F 7 C Although so called all season M S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires otherwise tire damage and ac cidents can occur lt Run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires Your service center will be glad to advise you Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles This can impair the handling characteristics Rotating the tires is not permissible when us ing different types of tires Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicat
207. it will not obstruct the driv er s vision No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks otherwise they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers lt Cupholders Notes Shatter proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter proof containers and do not transport hot drinks Otherwise there is the increased danger of injury in an accident lt Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con tainers into the cupholders This may result in damage lt Front gt Inthe front door compartments as a bottle holder for 1 quart 1 liter bottles for exam ple Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with the bottom slanted toward the front gt Inthe center console 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Storage compartments Insertable cupholder The insertable cupholder is located in the compartment below the center armrest P a r a gt P re a_i Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center console Rear gt Inthe front door compartments as a bottle holder for 25 ounce 0 75 liter bottles for example Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with the bottom slanted toward the front gt Inthe center armrest Pull the center armrest forward at the strap To open press the button To close push both covers back in one after the other 128 Online Edition for Part no 01
208. ith a tow truck with a so called lift bar or on a flat bed xDrive Towing a vehicle with xDrive Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised otherwise the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged lt Towing other vehicles General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed otherwise it will not be possible to control vehicle response Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage gt Switch on the hazard warning system de pending on local regulations gt Ifthe electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result lt Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following gt Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associate
209. ity Control DSC 99 Emergency operation auto matic transmission refer to Overriding selector lever lock 69 283 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Emergency operation door lock refer to Manual opera tion 37 Emergency operation fuel filler flap unlocking man ually 229 Emergency Request 257 Energy conscious driving re fer to Current fuel consump tion 74 Energy saving Automatic Start Stop function 61 Energy saving refer to Sav ing fuel 139 Engine breaking in 132 Engine compartment 242 Engine coolant refer to Cool ant 246 Engine oil adding 245 Engine oil additives refer to Approved engine oils 245 Engine oil alternative oil types 245 Engine oil BMW maintenance system 247 Engine oil change intervals refer to Service require ments 80 Engine oil checking the level 243 Engine oil filling ca pacity 271 Engine oil temperature 74 Engine oil types alterna tive 245 Engine oil types ap proved 245 Engine overheating refer to Coolant temperature 74 Engine start assistance 258 Engine starting 60 Engine starting Comfort Ac cess 39 Engine starting Start Stop button 59 284 Engine stopping Start Stop button 59 Engine switching off 61 Environmentally friendly driv ing refer to Current fuel consumption 74 Equalizer 166 Equipment interior 115 ESP Electronic Stability Pro gram refer to Dynamic Sta
210. ity Wheels and tires Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Tire inflation pressure Safety information It is not merely the tires service life but also driving comfort and to a great extent driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure Checking the pressure Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all four tires Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours When the tires are warm the tire inflation pressure is higher Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres sure and correct it as needed at least twice a month and before a long trip If you fail to ob serve this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle s driving stability but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accide
211. l arrows 2 Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described above otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them otherwise they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers Never exceed either the approved gross vehi cle weight or either of the approved axle loads as excessive loads can pose a Safety hazard and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving tips jem Loading Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten gt Do not let objects project into the opening the heavy duty cargo straps Do not secure path of the tailgate cargo using the upper top tether refer to gt Drive smoothly Avoid sudden acceleration page 55 mounting points otherwise these and braking maneuvers Take corners gen may become damaged lt tly Roof mounted luggage rack Rear luggage rack Notes Notes A special rack system is available as an op A special rear rack is available as an optional tional accessory accessory It does not require a trailer hitch Follow the installation instructions for the rear Anchorage points rack The anchorage points are located on the roof railing Anchorage points Attachment Follow the installation instructions for the roof
212. lected The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the volume of the called party Depending on the mobile phone the volumes may need to be ad justed The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired Settings Tone Volume settings a eh Select the desired setting Microphone or Loudspeak on To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Incoming call Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network the name of the contact is displayed Other wise only the phone number is displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Telephone Communication If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact only the name of the contact is dis played For calls on the additional telephone the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network An incoming call to one of the telephones is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone Accepting a call a Press the button on the steering wheel or A Accept a i z AS Incoming call y Am DI Accept i S4 4989123456789 calling Device Handy 1 Rejecting a call Reject Ending a call
213. leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered gt Do not place slip covers seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags gt Do not hang pieces of clothing such as jackets over the backrests gt Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered gt Do not remove the airbag restraint system Do not remove the steering wheel Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels cover them or modify them in any way gt Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system This also applies to steering wheel covers the dashboard the seats the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner Even when all instructions are followed closely injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short term and in most cases temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals In the case of a malfunction deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered otherwise there is the danger of burns Only have the airbags checked repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center
214. les continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards In rare cases therefore the features de scribed in this Owner s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner s Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Notes ss For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation If your vehicle is to be oper ated in a different country it might be neces sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ Ing operating conditions and permit requirements If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a cer tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there Further information can be obtained from your Service Center Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics requires suitable maintenance and repair methods Therefore have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards
215. lighter than your vehicle or it will not be possible to control vehicle response lt Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage lt 260 Automatic transmission 6 gear Selector lever in position N Adhere to the towing speed and distance Do not exceed a towing speed of 40 mph 70 km h and a towing distance of 90 miles 150 km or damage to the transmis sion can occur Being towed Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions or vehicle damage or accidents may occur lt gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on otherwise the low beams tail lights turn signals and windshield wipers may be un available gt Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted as the front wheels could turn gt When the engine is stopped there is no power assist Consequently more force needs to be applied when braking and steering V Larger steering wheel movements are re quired gt Switch on the hazard warning system de pending on local regulations gt Ifthe electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow Tow truck sDrive Vehicles with automatic transmission 6 gear Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Have your vehicle transported w
216. line Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination entry Navigation Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation sys tem house numbers up to number 2 000 can be entered 1 House number 2 Say the house number Say each digit separately 3 Continue making the entry as prompted by the system Starting destination guidance gt Start guidance Planning a trip with intermediate destinations New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations Navigation Map Move the controller to the left if necessary amp Guidance Enter new destination oS Se YS Select the type of destination entry amp New destination Enter address using Enter address Address book Ce 9 Last destinations F Points of Interest Interactive map 7 Enter the intermediate destination 8 Start guidance Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip Enter new destination Select the type of destination entry Enter the intermediate destination S w S Add as another destination The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted 5 Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located at the desired loca tion in the list 6 Press the controller Starting the trip 1 After all intermediate destinations are en tered highlight the
217. line Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Malfunction fs p The warning light lights up The sys i SEL tem is malfunctioning or has failed A message appears on the Control Display More information refer to page 82 Park Distance Control PDC The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control the backup camera refer to page 107 can be switched on PDC supports you when parking A slow ap proach to an object in front of or behind your vehicle is announced by gt Signal tones gt Visual display Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers The range is approx 6 ft 2 m An acoustic warning is first given gt By the front sensors and two rear corner sensors at approx 24 in 60 cm gt By the rear middle sensors at approx 5 ft 1 50 m System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situa tion Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC s signal tone Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active For technical reasons the system may othe
218. ll be able to hear you The first aid kit is located in a storage compart Initiating an Emergency Request ment on the right side in the cargo area automatically Some of the articles contained in the first aid Under certain conditions an Emergency Re pouch have a limited service life quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items promptly Jump starting Warning triangle J 4 If the battery is discharged an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle On the inside of the tailgate To remove press on the tab arrow jury always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running and two jumper cables Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles adhere strictly to the following proce dure Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in Preparation 1 2 3 258 Check whether the battery of the other ve hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi mately the same capacitance in Ah This information can be found on the battery Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle Switch off any electronic systems power consumers in both vehicles Online Edition for Part no 01 4
219. lls The call on hold is resumed Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call 1 Establish two calls 2 a Conference call 204 When terminating a conference call both calls are ended If one call is terminated by another party the other call can be continued Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active the microphone can be muted 1 Telephone 2 Active calls 3 y Microphone mute A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated gt When anew connection is established gt When switching between call parties DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling de vices e g to make a remote inquiry of an an swering machine The DTMF code is needed for this purpose 1 Telephone 2 Select the contact from a list or Dial number 3 Keypad dialing 4 Enter the DTMF code via iDrive Phone book Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored The entries can be selected to make a call 1 Telephone 2 Phone book A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Telephone Communication a A Z search ANngi BMW Service Christoph Dr Tom Mustermann Office Calling a contact i Con
220. low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear 139 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving tips _ ecm Saving fuel Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt On a downhill gradient take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestion Automatic Engine Start Stop Function The Automatic Start Stop Function of your ve hicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop Additional information on the Automatic Engine Start Stop Function refer to page 61 If the engine is stopped and then started again fuel consumption and emissions drop com pared to an engine that runs permanently Stopping the engine even for just a few sec onds can result in savings Use of this system can cause premature wear on certain vehicle components In addition fuel consumption depends on other factors as well such as driving style road conditions maintenance and environmental factors Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel especially in city and stop and go traffic
221. lt Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Fold out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions for example Switch off the ignition 2 Under frosty conditions ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield 3 Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx 3 sec onds until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position 66 After the wipers are folded back down the washer wiper system refer to page 64 must be reactivated Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on fold the wipers back down to the windshield other wise the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on lt Switch on the ignition hm Press the wiper levers down The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation Rear window wiper 1 Intermittent wipe When reverse gear is engaged the system switches to continuous operation 2 Cleaning the rear window The rear window wiper does not move if the lever is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on To switch on the rear window wiper 1 Move the lever to its basic position 2 Select the required position again Do not use the washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty Do not use washing mechanisms wh
222. ly remove aggressive substances such as spilled fuel oil grease or bird drop pings to prevent damage to or discoloration of the paintwork Leather care Remove dust from the leather often using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Otherwise particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface To guard against discoloration such as from clothing provide leather care roughly every two months Clean light colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable Use leather care products otherwise dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface Suitable care products are available from the service center Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Care Mobility If they are very dirty e g beverage stains use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions Avoid rubbing the material vigorously Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed lt Caring for special components Light alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle only use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value
223. m is operable The SIM card integrated in the vehicle is activated gt ConnectedDrive subscription is available Only press the SOS button in an emergency Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions lt Initiating an Emergency Request 1 Press the cover briefly to open it 2 Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up gt The LED lights up an Emergency Request was initiated If the circumstances allow this remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established gt The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established Once the BMW Response Center has re ceived your Emergency Request the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances 257 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Breakdown assistance For this purpose data that are used to de First aid kit termine the necessary rescue measures such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established are transmitted to the BMW Response Center gt Ifthe LED is flashing but the BMW Re sponse Center cannot be heard on the hands free system the hands free system may be malfunctioning However the BMW Response Center may sti
224. med 1 Radio 2 FM 3 Select the desired station Open Options 5 Rename to If necessary wait for the desired name to be displayed The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations RDS RDS broadcasts additional information such as the station name in the FM wave band i 2 3 4 s Options yitching the RDS on off Radio EM Open Options RDS LY Split screen Switch off control display FM O H O RDS The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digi tal signals License conditions HD Radio Technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD HD Radio and Arc logos are proprietary trade marks of iBiquity Digital Corp 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ Radio Activating deactivating digital radio reception 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Open Options 4 HD Radio Reception The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use H3 This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital When tuning to a station with a digital signal it may take several seconds for the station to be played back in digital quality Note on HD stations whose station name ends in HD or with HD1
225. mode otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously worsens lt Comfortable interior climate For almost all conditions the AUTO program 4 offers the optimum air distribution and air flow rate refer to AUTO program below Select a comfortable interior temperature only The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options Most of these settings are stored for the re mote control currently in use Personal Profile settings refer to page 33 Manual air distribution Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro gram gt wa Windows gt me Upper body region gt wE Footwell The programs can be combined as necessary Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity and then keeps it constant Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting regardless of the external temperature At the lowest setting cooling is continuous re gardless of the external temperature Maximum cooling VS Press the button The system is set to the lowest tem perature maximum air volume and recircu lated air mode Air flows out of
226. mote control led systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems The universal garage door opener replaces up to 3 different hand held transmitters To operate it the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed for the desired functions The hand held trans mitter for the system is needed for the pro gramming procedure During programming During programming and before activat ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Opener ensure that there are no people ani mals or objects in the range of movement of the remote controlled device otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter Before selling the vehicle delete the stored functions for security reasons Compatibility A If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the operating instructions of the system being operated the system is generally compatible with the universal ga rage door opener If you have any questions please contact gt Your service center gt www homelink com on the Internet HomeL_ink is a registered trademark of the Gentex Corporation Controls on the interior rearview mirror 1 LED 2 Buttons Hand held transmitter required for pro gramming Programming General information 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Initial setup Press the right and left buttons on the inte rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap prox 20 seco
227. mounted luggage rack Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the panoramic glass sunroof Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center The anchorage points are under the covers in of gravity when loaded they have a major ef the bumper Remove the covers refer to fect on vehicle handling and steering re page 262 sponse Therefore note the following when loading and driving gt Do not exceed the approved roof axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight Distribute the roof load uniformly The roof load should not be too large in area gt Always load the heaviest pieces on the bottom gt Fasten the roof mounted luggage se curely for instance using lashing straps 138 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Saving fuel Drivingtips tips Saving fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions Fuel consumption depends on a number
228. move it 2 Take the warning triangle out of the bracket refer to page 258 3 Release the screws of the tailgate panel arrows 3 Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down the upper clip arrow 1 4 Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down ward 5 Push out the handle for opening manually in the event of an electrical malfunction re fer to page 38 insert it through the open ing and take off the panel 254 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Replacing components 6 Release the bulb holder with the clip see arrows and remove it 7 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement 8 Re engage the bulb holder so that it audi bly clicks into place 9 Insert the handle for opening manually through the tailgate panel opening and press it in 10 Reattach the tailgate panel License plate lamp center brake lamp and roadside parking lamp tail lamp These lamps are made using LED technology Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run flat tires re fer to page 241 as standard equipment They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa use run flat tires for your own safety Suitable to
229. movement could result in an accident lt Comfort function 1 Open the driver s door after unlocking or switch on the radio ready state refer to page 59 2 Briefly press the desired memory but ton 1 or 2 The seat is automatically moved to the stored position The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed Safety mode 1 Close the driver s door and switch the igni tion on or off refer to page 59 2 Press and hold the desired memory button 1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com pleted Mirrors Exterior mirrors General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver s mirror Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror as this will increase your risk of an accident lt Ata glance 1 Adjusting 2 Fold in and out 3 Left right Automatic Curb Monitor Selecting a mirror Lu To change over to the other mirror Slide the mirror changeover switch Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed Saving positions Seat and mirror memory refer to page 50 Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs for example press the edges of the mirror glass Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged
230. n Turn off split screen Split screen content Split screen map facing north Split screen current position lt 274 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Short commands for voice activation system BRG Split screen facing the direction of travel Split screen map in direction of travel Split screen perspective Split screen perspective Split screen expanded intersection zoom Splitscreen Exit ramp view Split screen scale feet Split screen scale feet e g split screen scale 100 feet Split screen scale meters Split screen scale meters e g split screen scale 100 meters Split screen scale kilometers Split screen scale kilometers e g split screen scale 5 kilometers Split screen scale miles Split screen scale miles e g split screen scale 5 miles Split screen highlight the traffic situation Split screen Traffic conditions Split screen computer Split screen on board infos Split screen trip computer Splitscreen trip computer Split screen scale automatically Split screen automatic scaling lt Destination guidance with intermediate destinations Enter a new destination Enter address Trip list Stored trips Radio TI Open a frequency Frequency megahertz e g 93 5 megahertz or frequency 93 5 Open the radio Radio Open the FM stations F Mc 275 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15
231. n alarm has been triggered Panic mode In dangerous situations trigger the alarm sys tem Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds To switch off the alarm press any button Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car 42 Interior motion sensor For the sensor to function properly the win dows and panoramic glass sunroof must be closed Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together such as in the following situations gt In duplex garages gt During transport on car carrying trains at sea or on a trailer gt When animals are to remain in the vehicle Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Lock Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked The indicator lamp lights up for approx 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor remain switched off until the vehicle is locked again Power windows General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls O
232. n and a message ap pears on the Control Display replace the remote control battery Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time 1 Take the integrated key out of the remote control refer to page 32 2 Remove the cover 3 Insert anew battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards 4 Press on the cover to close it Return used battery to a recycling center or to your service center Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to gt Opening of a door the hood or the tailgate gt Movements in the vehicle interior motion sensor refer to page 42 gt Changes in the vehicle tilt e g during at tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car gt Interruptions in battery voltage The alarm system briefly indicates tampering gt By sounding an acoustic alarm gt By switching on the hazard warning sys tem gt By flashing the high beams Arming and disarming the alarm system General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle either with the remote control or via Comfort Access the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock To stop this
233. n and off frequently shortens their life page 251 Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system including bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage present in the system there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly lt 252 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Replacing components Mobility Adhere to the general instructions refer to Turn signals front page 250 21 watt bulb PY21W With Xenon headlights the following lights are designed with LED technology 1 Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock gt Parking and roadside parking lights 2 Open the folding cover in the wheel arch refer to page 251 gt Daytime running lights Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Parking lights and roadside parking lights daytime running lights H8 bulb 35 watt 1 Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock 2 Remove the high beam cover refer to l page 251 3 Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the 3 Turn the bulb by approx 90 see arrow PETEN and pull it out 4 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement 5 Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and turn it all the way to the right 6 Attach the folding cover in the wheel ar
234. n inspection refer to Service requirements 80 Maintenance 247 Maintenance refer to Service booklet Maintenance refer to Service requirements 80 Maintenance require ments 247 Maintenance system BMW 247 Makeup mirror 119 Malfunction automatic trans mission with Steptronic 69 Malfunction door lock 37 Malfunction fuel filler flap 229 Malfunction tailgate 38 Malfunction warnings refer to Check Control 82 Manual air distribution 111 Manual mode automatic transmission with Step tronic 68 71 Manual operation door lock 37 Manual operation driver s door 37 Manual operation fuel filler flap 229 Manual operation selector lever lock automatic trans mission 69 Manual seat adjustment 46 Map destination entry 151 Map display in black and white 160 Map in split screen 159 Map view 157 Marking on approved tires 240 Master key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Maximum cooling 111 Maximum speed winter tires 240 Medical kit refer to First aid kit 258 Memory refer to Seat and mirror memory 50 Menus operating iDrive 20 Menus refer to iDrive operat ing concept 21 Message list traffic bulle tins 159 Messages 212 Microfilter with automatic cli mate control 113 Minimum tread tires 239 Mirror memory refer to Seat and mirror memory 50 Mirrors 51 Mirrors Automatic Curb Monitor 51 Mirrors folding in and out 52 Mirrors heating 52 Mirrors interior mirror 52 Mob
235. n now be opened from the outside only _ Safety switch for the rear on Press the button on the driver s door if children are being transported in the 57 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Transporting children safely This locks the rear window switches so that the windows cannot be operated from the rear safety switch refer to page 43 58 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock gt Radio ready state is switched on Individual electrical consumers can operate Comfort Access If the car is equipped with Comfort Access only insert the remote control into the ignition lock refer to page 39 under special circum stances Removing the remote control from the ignition lock Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock Do not forcibly pull the remot
236. n the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on off can be stored on a programmable memory button refer to page 24 for quick ac cess Map view Selecting the map view 1 Navigation 2 Map 157 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 EW eF 1ielamme Destination guidance Ata glance Function bar Route section with traffic obstruction Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 1 2 3 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different colors and styles depending on their classifica tion Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections Country borders are indicated by thin lines Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indi cate route sections with traffic obstructions depending on the map scale The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the ob struction The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction gt Red traffic sign the obstruction affects the planned route or direction gt Grey traffic sign the obstruction does not affect the planned route or direction Traffic bulletins refer to page 159 Planned route After destination guidance is started the plan ned route is displayed on the map 158 Status fields Show hide press the controller gt Upper status field
237. n the route Switch on the spoken instruction Navigation lt Enter address Enter address City State Postal Codex Guidance gt Start guidance Stop guidance gt Home address Route preference Route information lt Switch on voice instructions lt 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 RGus Short commands for voice activation system Repeat the spoken instruction Switch off the spoken instruction Display the address book Display the most recent destinations Open the traffic bulletins Points of Interest Repeat voice instructions Switch off voice instructions Address book Last destinations lt gt Traffic Info lt Points of interest lt ap Display the map Map facing north Map facing the direction of travel Perspective map Automatic scaling of the map Scale feet Scale meters Scale kilometers Scale miles gt Map lt Map facing north Map in direction of travek Map perspective view gt Map with automatic scaling Map scale feet Map scale meters e g map scale 100 meters Map scale kilometers e g map scale 5 kilometers Map scale miles e g map scale 5 miles Split screen settings Split screen Switch off the split screen Adjust the split screen Split screen map facing north Split screen current position Switch on splitscree
238. ndow washing con centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure water this could damage the washer system Do not mix window washing concentrate from different manufacturers this could cause the washer nozzles to clog Automatic transmission with Steptronic 6 gear In addition to the fully automatic mode gears can also be shifted manually using Steptronic refer to page 68 Parking the vehicle Secure the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the en gine running move the selector lever to posi tion P and set the handbrake otherwise the vehicle will begin moving lt Disengaging the remote control To remove the remote control from the ignition lock first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine interlock Remove the remote control from the ignition lock refer to page 59 Selector lever positions PRNDM S 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is displayed and the engaged gear such as M4 is displayed in manual mode Changing selector lever positions gt With the ignition switched on or the engine running the selector lever can be moved out of position P gt When the vehicle is stationary step on the brake before shifting out of P or N other wise the selector lever is locked shiftlock Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from
239. nds until the LED on the inte rior rearview mirror begins to flash All programmed settings of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror are deleted 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Interior equipment 3 Hold the hand held transmitter of the sys tem to be operated a distance of approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror The re quired distance depends on the particular hand held transmitter 4 Press the button of the desired function on the hand held transmitter and the button being programmed on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously and hold The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at first 5 When the LED flashes more rapidly re lease both buttons Rapid flashing indi cates that the button on the interior rear view mirror has been programmed If the LED does not flash faster after 60 seconds change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the hand held transmitter and repeat the step Multi ple trials at different distances may be nec essary Wait at least 15 seconds between trials 6 To program additional functions on other buttons repeat steps 3 to 5 The systems can be operated with the buttons on the interior rearview mirror Special characteristics of alternating code radio systems If the system cannot be operated after re peated programming check whether the sys tem to be opera
240. ne compartment Engine compartment Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and This chapter describes all series equipment as systems well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Important features in the engine compartment S 1 Coolant expansion tank 246 4 Jump starting positive terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 5 Filler neck for engine oil refer to Adding 3 Filler neck for washer fluid for the head engine oil lamp and window washer system 67 242 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Engine compartment Mobility Hood Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Risk of damage Before opening the hood ensure that the wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the window otherwise damage may occur lt 1 Pull the l
241. not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system including bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage present in the system there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly lt Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb s surface and reduce its service life Use a clean tissue cloth or something similar or hold the bulb by its base lt Light emitting diodes LED Light emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls displays and other equipment in your vehicle These light emitting diodes which operate us ing aconcept similar to that applied in conven tional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours otherwise irritation of the retina could result lt Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlamps in cool or humid weather When you drive with the lights switched on the con densation evaporates after a short time The headlamps do not need to be changed If the condensation in the headlamps does not evaporate after trips with the lights switched on and the amount of moisture in the head
242. ns and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance In entering your destination you can select from the following options gt Enter the destination manually see below gt Select the destination from the address book refer to page 148 gt Last destinations refer to page 149 Special destinations refer to page 149 Destination entry via map refer to page 151 gt Using the home address as the destina tion refer to page 149 gt Destination entry by voice refer to page 152 gt Destination entry via the Concierge serv ice refer to page 151 You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory buttons refer to page 24 Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation 146 system Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger lt Manual destination entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons refer to page 25 Stored town city and street names can be called up quickly gt Ifthe existing entries
243. ns permit ting The brake lights do not light up when the park ing brake is pulled Turn signal high beams headlamp flasher Turn signal Do not fold in the exterior mirrors While driving and when using the turn signal hazard warning flashers do not fold in the exterior mirrors otherwise the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in the appropriate position and will be diffi cult to detect Press the lever beyond the resistance point To switch off manually press the lever to the resistance point Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed When towing a trailer the indicator lamp may also signal the failure of a turn signal bulb on the trailer Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash 64 Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point The turn signal flashes three times This function can be activated or deactivated 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Triple turn signal F Lighting Pathway light Os BY Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use High beams headlamp flasher 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher Washer wiper system Notes Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if th
244. nsmissions transmis sion position P is engaged automatically gt Automatically after approx 30 minutes gt When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock Headlights gt Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers gt Soak areas that have been soiled e g due to insects with shampoo and wash off with water gt Thaw ice with de icing spray do not use an ice scraper After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to dry them otherwise braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur Fully remove any residue from the windows to prevent obstruction of view from streaking wiping noises and wiper wear Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW since these have been tested and approved 264 Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container When cleaning the interior open the doors or windows Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention Environmental influences in areas with high air pollution or natural contami nants such as tree resin or pollen can have an impact on the vehicle paint Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these in fluences Immediate
245. nsmitted dur ing a Service Request If possible your service partner will establish contact with you Starting a Service Request 1 BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive 2 Service Request 3 Start service A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message refer to page 82 Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv ice partner prior to the service deadline If pos sible the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged 223 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication ConnectedDrive To check when your service partner was noti fied 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status AE Vehicle Info Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status ECO PRO Tips 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request TeleService Report Transmits technical data when needed from your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals these are evaluated for the continued development of BMW products TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical conditions and that have a current ConnectedDrive subscription it is free of charge Neither personal nor position data are trans mitted To check when your service partner was noti fied Vehicle Info Vehicle status Options ow hy Last Teleservice Info Services status Displaying available services Display of
246. nstance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems The following short commands apply to vehi cles equipped with a voice activation system They have no function in vehicles in which only l l the mobile phone is operated using the voice When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Adjusting Vehicle Function Command Opens the main menu Main menu Open the options Options Open the settings Settings Settings on the Control Display Control display Open the time and date gt Time and datex Open the language and units gt Language and units Open the speed limit Speeck Open the light Lighting Open the door lock Door locks 272 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Short commands for voice activation system BRG KiKa Vehicle information Computer Open the computer Open the trip computer gt Onboard infox gt Trip computer Vehicle Open the vehicle information Open the vehicle status Vehicle infox lt Vehicle status Navigation General information Navigation menu Open the destination entry Enter the address Enter the town city Enter the country Enter the postal code Open destination guidance Start destination guidance Terminate destination guidance Open the home address Open the route criteria Ope
247. nt 232 Tires heat up while driving and the tire infla tion pressure increases along with the tire s temperature The tire inflation pressure speci fications apply to cold tires or tires at ambient temperature Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours The values displayed by tire inflation stations may be up to 0 1 bar 2 psi too low For the Flat Tire Monitor after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to a new value reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 93 For the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to a new value reset the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 96 Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct infla tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW a list of these is available from your service center For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures observe the following gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Maximum permitted driving speed Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km h For normal driving up to 100 mph 160 km h adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds
248. ntained in the tire identification mark DOT 2313 means that the tire was manufactured in the week 23 of 2013 BMW recommends that you replace all tires af ter 6 years at most even if some tires may last for 10 years 237 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AAA BC Temperature A B C Conform to Federal Safety Requirements All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades lt Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
249. ntent of 85 or with Flex Fuel as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system 230 The engine is knock controlled Therefore you can refuel with different recommended fuel grades Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91 Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89 Minimum fuel grade Do not fill up with fuel below the speci fied minimum quality otherwise the engine may not run properly lt If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life Minimum fuel grade The use of poor quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage Addi tionally problems relating to drivability start ing and stalling especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude may occur If drivability problems are encountered we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills To avoid harmful en gine deposits it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Fuel Mobility bp BMW recommends BP fuels 231 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobil
250. o 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Office Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed After an appointment or after a task is due the reminder is no longer dis played 1 Office 2 Reminders 3 Select the desired reminder The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed Using contact data Ata glance Contact data from appointments tasks text messages emails and notes can be stored or selected Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1 Use contact data 2 Display the contact or select the phone number gt Select the contact to display contact details gt Select the phone number to establish a connection directly Storing contact data 1 Use contact data 2 Highlight the phone number or e mail ad dress 3 Open Options 4 Add to existing contact or Store as new contact 216 Reading out loud Text messages e mails appointment entries tasks and notes can be read out loud 1 Select the desired message appointment task or note 2 gt Select the symbol The following options are available during reading gt Pause Interrupt reading Select again to restart reading gt K Back to beginning Start reading the message again from the beginning gt K Select the symbol Go back one paragraph gt gt Select the symbol Skip a paragraph gt To end reading
251. o an outside antenna of the vehicle This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack age can be obtained at www bmwusa com bluetooth Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required 1 Telephone 2 Open Options 3 Bluetooth info 4 Display system information These approved mobile phones with a certain software version support the vehicle functions described below Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad as this may lead to a malfunction Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Telephone Communication A software update refer to page 193 can be performed if necessary Notes At high temperatures the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed When using the mobile phone via the vehicle note the operating instructions of the mobile phone Pairing unpairing the mobile phone General informat
252. o be con nected The functions assigned to the mobile phone before unpairing are assigned to the mobile Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Telephone Communication phone when it is reconnected These functions are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al ready connected Configuring the mobile phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Highlight the mobile phone to be config ured Open Options 5 Configure phone 6 Atleast one function must be selected gt Telephone gt Additional telephone gt Audio 7 OK If a function has already been assigned to an other connected mobile phone the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo bile phone is unpaired when the function is as signed to a new mobile phone Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional telephone can be swapped automatically 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Swap phone addit phone Unpairing the mobile phone 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired 4 Open Options 5 Remove phone from list L amp Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Gerat 2 Configure phone Remove phone from list Bluetooth telephone O Bluetooth audio What to do if
253. o determine how this may re duce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Loading Drivingtips tips Load R cCC rrr Max Load meh Hi lt Max Load hihih if lt Max Load The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo that can be transported gt Very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle gt Heavy cargo stow as far forward and as low as possible ideally directly behind the backrests Cover sharp edges and corners gt Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge of the backrests gt If necessary fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo gt Use the partition net refer to page 121 to protect passengers Make sure that ob jects cannot penetrate the partition net gt Place protective material around any sharp edged or pointed objects that could bump against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area Securing cargo gt Smaller and lighter items secure with re taining straps a cargo net or draw straps gt Larger and heavy objects secure with cargo straps Cargo straps can be attached to two lash ing eyes on the cargo area side panel ar rows 1 and two lashing eyes on the cargo area rear pane
254. o roll such as in an automatic car wash follow the instructions in Car washes re fer to page 263 Starting the engine General information Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas otherwise breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas lt Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the engine running otherwise it presents a poten tial source of danger Before leaving the car with the engine running shift to neutral or engage transmission posi tion P and set the parking brake firmly other wise the vehicle may begin to roll 60 Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession Otherwise the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter lt Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds Starting the engine Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or with Comfort Access inside the vehicle refer to page 39 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Engage transmission position P if neces Sary 3 Press the Start Stop button The ignition is activated automatically for a certain t
255. of 5 to 9 Do not use abrasive cleaners ora steam jet hotter than 140 F 60 C otherwise damage may result Adhere to the manufac turer instructions Aggressive acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroy the protective coating of neighboring components such as the brake disc Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water possibly with shampoo added partic ularly when they have been exposed to road Salt Rubber components Aside from water treat only with rubber cleansers When cleaning rubber seals do not use any silicon containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag Then dry with a soft cloth Plastic components These include Imitation leather surfaces Headliner Lamp lenses Instrument cluster cover Matte black spray coated components VV VV VV Painted parts in the interior Clean with a microfiber cloth Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces Sary Do not soak the headliner Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents such as lacquer thinners heavy duty grease removers fuel or such this could lead to surface damage lt Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety
256. of burns Folding up Only hold the hot lighter by its head oth Fold the sun visor up erwise there is the danger of getting burned Switch off the ignition and take the remote Glare protection from the side control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn Folding down themselves 1 Fold the sun visor down Replace the cover after use to the side window use otherwise objects that fall into the lighter i socket or power socket could cause a short Folding up circuit lt To close the sun visor proceed in reverse or der Connecting electrical Vanity mirror devices A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on each sun visor The mirror lighting comes on Note when the cover is opened Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to Ashtray cigarette lighter the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery Opening Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volt Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size Pull cover 2 up Emptying Take out the insert 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Interior equipment Front center console Cargo area Cargo covers
257. of dif ferent factors The implementation of certain measures driv ing style and regular maintenance refer to page 247 can have an influence on fuel con sumption and on the environmental impact Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Remove attached parts following use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors roof or rear luggage racks after use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption Closing the windows and panoramic glass sunroof Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resist ance and raises fuel consumption Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and if necessary correct the tire infla tion pressure refer to page 232 at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption Avoid high engine speeds Driving at a
258. of various areas gt Screen settings e g Switch off control display gt Control options for the selected main menu e g for Radio gt If applicable further operating options for the selected menu for instance Store station Changing settings 1 Selecta field 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed w Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting Gong 3 Press the controller Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 iDrive EKLE EY Function is activated EJ The function is deactivated Example setting the clock Setting the clock 1 K Press the button The main menu is displayed 2 Turn the controller until Settings is high lighted and then press the controller Main menu CD Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive O Vehicle Info f Settings 3 If necessary move the controller to the left to display Time Date 4 Turn the controller until Time Date is highlighted and then press the controller E Settings a s Time Date Language Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks 5 Turn the controller until Time is high lighted and then press the cont
259. ol with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for exam ple cannot operate the roof and injure them selves Tilting the glass sunroof Press the switch briefly gt The closed roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly Dao SES gt The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position The sliding visor stays com pletely open 44 Pressing the switch again closes the sliding visor al most completely Do not use force to close the sliding visor Do not use force to close the sliding visor with the glass sunroof in its tilted position oth erwise the mechanism will be damaged lt Opening closing the sliding visor gt Press the switch in the de sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there ol E The sliding visor moves E while the switch is being held gt Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point The sliding visor moves automatically Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion Opening closing the glass sunroof With the sliding visor open proceed as descri bed under Sliding visor Opening closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together f A T The glass sunroof and sliding vi a sor move together Pressing the switch again stops the motion Press the switch twice in the de sired direction past the resist ance point Convenient operation refer to pag
260. ols Storage compartments Storage compartments Interior gt Glove compartment refer to page 125 gt Compartments in the center console gt Compartments in the doors gt Bottle holders in the doors cupholders re fer to page 127 Cargo area gt Lashing eyes refer to page 137 gt Storage compartment under the cargo floor panel refer to page 123 Left and right storage compartments gt Multi function hook refer to page 124 Storage compartment package For your comfort Interior gt Insertable cupholder refer to page 128 gt Front center armrest refer to page 126 gt Nets on the backrests of the front seats gt Retaining straps in the front door compart ments gt Rear center armrest with integrated cu pholders Cargo area gt Retaining strap on the left side panel for securing small items Retaining straps on the cargo area floor gt Insertable partition elements for the stor age compartment under the cargo floor panel used to variably subdivide the stor age compartment With partition net arrange the partition ele ments in such a way that there is enough space at the rear of the storage compart ment for the partition net gt Storage net next to the storage compart ment on the right in the cargo area Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located at the grab han dles in the rear Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks ensure that
261. ols for changing the wheels are available from the service center as an acces sory Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance free i e the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble After a battery replacement have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available Charging the battery Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery lt 255 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Replacing components General information Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to achieve the full battery life It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following cases gt When the vehicle is frequently used to drive short distances gt When the vehicle has not been driven for more than one month Starting aid terminals
262. on the data volume a data up date may take several hours Update during the trip to preserve battery During the update only the basic functions of the navigation system are available The status of the update can be viewed gt After the updating process is complete the system restarts gt Remove the medium with the navigation data after the update Performing an update 1 Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up 2 Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play 3 Enter the authorization code of the naviga tion DVD 4 Change the DVD if necessary After the trip is interrupted follow the instruc tions on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation system Navigation Viewing the status 1 Open Options 2 Navigation update Removing navigation DVD 1 A Press button 1 The DVD emerges slightly from the drive ANAF TT SI Oe F 2 Remove the DVD 145 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Destination entry Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functio
263. on the door handle arrow 2 with your finger for approx 1 second This corresponds to pressing the Lock but ton To save battery power ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle lf a remote control is detected within the vehi cle the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again Convenient closing Press the area arrow 2 with your finger and hold In addition the windows and the panoramic glass sunroof close 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Monitor the closing process Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured Removing the hand from the door handle immediately stops the closing process lt Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate This corresponds to pressing the amp button If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo area is detected in the locked vehicle the tail gate opens again Ignition on Pressing the Start Stop button switches the ignition on When doing so do not depress the brake pedal otherwise the engine will start Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle It is not necessary to insert a re mote control into the ignition lock refer to page 59 Switching off the engine in cars with a
264. onal function Se a eS gt Additional telephone gt Office gt Bluetooth audio 6 OK An additional function cannot be assigned to a telephone while it is deactivated Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone The additional telephone can be used to ac cept incoming calls refer to page 202 While a call is active on the additional telephone re 199 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis play Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle s occupants and to other road users only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is stationary lt 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Add new phone The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played 4 Toperform additional steps on the mobile phone refer to the mobile phone operating instructions for instance search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new de vice The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display 5 Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display 6 You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass key Enter the passkey and confirm or Compare the c
265. one 3 Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary The connection is established Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the contact if necessary 5 Select the type of number Home Business Mobile or Other Complete the entries if necessary 7 Store contact Received calls Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played 1 Telephone 2 Received calls amp Telephone Active calls Phone book f ma Redial t gt V Received calls Ta Dial number Messages Bluetooth phone Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry The connection is established Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list 206 Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the contact if necessary 5 Select the type of number Home Business
266. ons In this case the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up In this case change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If it is not possible to activate the airbags have the person sit in the rear To make sure that occupation of the seat cushion can be detected correctly gt Do not attach seat covers seat cushion padding ball mats or other items to the passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW gt Donot place electronic devices on the pas senger seat if a child restraint fixing system is mounted on the seat gt Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below 92 Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti vated gt The indicator lamp does not light up when for example a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated Most child seats are detected by the system
267. ons that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle Marks the end of a specific item of information Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions lt Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system amp Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Vehicle equipment This Owner s Manual describes all models all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered in the model series Therefore this Owner s Manual also de scribes and depicts equipment that may not be contained in your vehicle because of the se lected special equipment or country version for example This also applies to safety related functions and systems For options and equipment not described in this Owner s Manual please refer to the Sup plementary Owner s Manuals On right hand drive vehicles some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations Status of this Owner s Manual at time of printing The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehic
268. ontact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 216 Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud refer to page 216 Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days 1 Office 2 Tasks Sorting the task list 1 Select the header in the task list Tasks Subject Auto test Task 1 Task 3 2 Select the sorting criterion gt Priority gt Subject gt Due date Displaying the task 1 Select the desired task 2 Scroll in the task if necessary gt Turn the controller gt 0 LB Select the symbol Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 216 Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud refer to page 216 Notes Displaying notes 1 Office 2 Notes All notes are displayed Displaying the note 1 Select the desired note EA Warners A A Team Meeting organisieren Name Fahrzeug buchen 2 Scrollin the note if necessary gt Turn the controller gt 1 E Select the symbol Using contact data Contact data from appointments tasks text messages e mails and notes can be saved or selected refer to page 216 Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud refer to page 216 215 Online Edition for Part n
269. ontrol number on the vehi cle display with the control number on the mobile phone display Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the ve hicle OK 7 Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used 8 OK 200 If the pairing was successful the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired White symbol the function is active Gray symbol the function is inactive Symbol Function ag Telephone a Additional telephone n Audio source Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once Three mobile phones can be connected with the vehicle at once If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 201 Following the initial pairing gt The mobile phone is detected connected in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on gt The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detec tion depending on the mobile phone gt Four mobile phones can be paired Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones e g authorization or a secure connection refer to the mobile phone operating instructions Connecting a particular mobile phone 1 Telephone 2 Bluetooth phone 3 Select the mobile phone that is t
270. or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo Sives Non professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag either of which could result in injury lt Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body The front and side airbags on the front passen ger side are activated or deactivated accord ingly by the system The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags deactivated or activated refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Safety Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell otherwise the front passenger airbags may not function properly Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat refer to the safety notes and in structions under Children on the front passen ger seat refer to page 54 lt Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults the front passenger airbags may be deacti vated in certain sitting positi
271. oramic glass sunroof 45 Initializing Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Inside brake lamps bulb re placement 254 Installation location tele phone 126 Instrument cluster 16 Instrument lighting 89 Instrument panel refer to In strument cluster 16 Instruments refer to Cock pit 14 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote control 115 Interactive map 151 Interior equipment 115 Interior lights 89 Interior lights remote con trol 35 Interior mirror 52 Interior motion sensor 42 Interior rearview mirror auto matic dimming 52 Interior rearview mirror com pass 117 Interior temperature setting automatic climate con trol 110 Interlock refer to Disengag ing the remote control 67 Intermediate destina tions 153 Internet page 6 Intersection entering for navi gation 147 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 255 Jack refer to Vehicle jack 255 Joystick refer to Selector lever 70 Jump starting 258 K Keyless Go refer to Comfort Access 39 Keyless opening and closing refer to Comfort Access 39 Key Memory refer to Per sonal Profile 32 Key refer to Integrated key remote control 32 Kickdown automatic trans mission with Step tronic 68 70 Knee airbag 90 Knocking control 230 L Label run flat tire 241 Lamp and bulb replacement light replacement 250 Lamps 85 Lamps automatic headlight control 86 Lamps High beam Assis tant 87 Lamps replacing refer to Lamp
272. osition to contact LiG Options FY Split screen Switch off control display Navigation Store position as contact Add position to contact EY Receive Traffic Info EY Dynamic guidance Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination entry Navigation 4 Depending on the selection choose an ex isting contact from the list Select the type of address and enter the first and last name 5 Store in vehicle Editing or deleting an address 1 Navigation Address book Highlight the entry Open Options epp Edit in Contacts or Delete entry Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored Specify the home address refer to page 211 1 Navigation 2 Address book 3 Home i Gy Address book Check My contacts address Home Andreas Angela Hans Juergen Marcus 4 Start guidance Last destinations At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance Calling up the last destination 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations Navigation Enter address Address book s Last destinations Points of Interest WETE Stored trips Route information Starting destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations 3 Select the destination 4 Start guidance Editing the destination 1 Navigation Last
273. passenger seat the back rest width must be opened completely Do not change the adjustment after this otherwise the stability of the child seat will be reduced lt Child seat security bt A 7 Le a d f _ j f if j f J i j a wn p E d a a j i lt A p So f P 3 S yf a a The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked to prevent ex tension in order to permit attachment of child restraint fixing systems Locking the safety belt 1 Pull out the belt webbing completely 2 Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system The safety belt is locked Unlocking the safety belt 1 Open the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint fixing system 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com pletely LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren Note Manufacturer s information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac turer otherwise the level of protection may be reduced lt Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb 30 kg when the child i
274. pening Press the switch to the resistance point gt The window opens while the switch is held a Press the switch beyond the resist ance point The window opens automatically Pressing again stops the motion Closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear otherwise injuries may result Pa gt Pull the switch to the resistance point The window closes while the switch is held Za gt Pull the switch beyond the resistance point The window closes automatically Pressing the switch stops the motion Convenient operation via the remote control refer to page 34 Convenient operation via the door lock is not supported Convenient closing refer to page 39 with Comfort Access After the ignition is switched off When the remote control is removed or the ig nition is switched off the windows can con tinue to be operated for approx 1 minute as long as no door is opened Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes the closing action is inter rupted The window reopens slightly Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection Even with the pinch protection system check that the window s closing path is clear other wise the closing action may not stop in certain situations e g if thin objects are present lt Do not use window accessories Do not install any acces
275. po sition mode or when parked Such contact could lead to a fire and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age Do not touch hot exhaust pipes otherwise there is the danger of getting burned lt Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle It is not recommended to use mobile phones such as mobile phones without a direct con nection to an external aerial in the vehicle s passenger compartment Otherwise the vehi cle electronics and mobile communication de vices can interfere with each other In addition there is no assurance that the radiation gener ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior lt Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads re duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning lt Driving tips The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire tread depth decreases Minimum tread depth refer to page 239 Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 12 inches 30 cm and at this height no faster than walking speed up to 6 mph 10 km h Adhe
276. r wise be too late in issuing a warning lt Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement for in stance gt With tow bars and trailer hitches gt With thin or wedge shaped objects gt With low objects gt With objects with corners and sharp edges Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds High protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range gt In heavy rain gt When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice When sensors are covered in snow gt On rough road surfaces In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls e g in underground ga rages In heavy exhaust gt Due to other ultrasound sources e g sweeping machines high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on shift the selector lever into posi tion R Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually Py Pre
277. r lock the driver s door using the integrated key in the door lock The other doors must be un locked or locked from the inside Opening and closing from the inside iy Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle The doors and the tailgate are locked or un locked when the front doors are closed but they are not secured against theft The fuel filler flap remains unlocked Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Select the desired function gt Lock if no door is opened The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened gt Lock after start to drive The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away amp Doorlocks si joor locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto O Lock if no door is opened O Lock after start to drive O Flash when lock unlock Unlocking and opening Press the button The doors are E unlocked To open pull the door handle above the armrest gt Pull the door handle above the armrest twice the door is unlocked the first time and opened the second time Locking gt eq gt Press the lock button of a door To prevent you from being locked out the opened driver s door cannot be locked using the lock button Press the button The doors are locked Take the remote control with you People or animals left una
278. r BMW center for additional in formation Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm Battery posts terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 oo Notes Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty gt Rust Perforation Limited Warranty gt Federal Emissions System Defect War ranty gt Federal Emissions Performance Warranty gt California Emis
279. r s and front passenger seat fa The indicator lamp lights up and a e signal sounds In addition a message A appears on the Control Display l Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx 5 mph 8 km h It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage Have the safety belts including the safety belt tensioners replaced and have the belt anchors checked Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center otherwise it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly Head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats otherwise there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident lt Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Adjusting Front Before transporting passengers f Reinstall the head restraint before trans Height adjustment porting anyone in the seat o
280. r the buttons for the ALL program or rear window heating Ventilation 1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents 2 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direc tion e g if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun Draft free ventilation Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in coming air The activated charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle Your service center replaces this combined fil ter during routine maintenance Parked car ventilation The concept The parked car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem peratures The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature either directly or by us ing a preset switch on time It remains switched on for 30 minutes Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing the bat tery to be recharged in normal operation be tween use Open the vents to allow air to flow out They can be operated via iDrive Switching on off directly 1 Settings 2 Climate 113 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Climate 3 Activate parked car vent
281. ra Press the button on the steering wheel or 1 Telephone 2 End call t i ae amp Active calls AW End call Ss 4989123456789 K 00 55 Entering a phone number Dialing a number 1 Telephone 2 Dial number 3 Select the digits individually 4 y Select the symbol SF 08912 The phone number can also be entered by voice Calls with multiple parties General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call These func tions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone If a second call comes in during an ongoing call a call waiting signal is sounded A Accept The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call 1 Telephone 2 Active calls 3 S3 Hold The existing call is put on hold A SF Active calls S ave Hold Busters 4 Dial the new phone number or select it from a list St Return The call on hold is resumed Switching between two calls hold call The active call is displayed in color The call on hold is displayed in gray Swap ca
282. re telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pres sure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the in stallation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
283. re to water depth and speed limita tions Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed otherwise the vehicle s engine the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged lt Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces Sary The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats carpets and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals otherwise the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving 133 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving tips eka Things to remember when driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed such
284. res and maintains the speed Deactivating cruise control Push the lever upwards or downwards ar row 3 The displays in the speedometer go out In addition the system is automatically deacti vated when gt The brakes are applied gt Selector lever position N is engaged or transmission position D is disengaged gt When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti vated gt When DSC or ABS is intervening Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal Once the accelerator 104 pedal is released the stored speed is achieved again and maintained Warning light _ The warning lamp comes on when E cruise control has been deactivated as a result of DSC intervention for example A message appears on the Control Display t Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press the button arrow 4 The last stored speed is resumed and maintained In the following cases the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again gt When driving stability control systems in tervene gt When selector lever position N is engaged or transmission position D is disengaged gt When the ignition is switched off Displays in the instrument cluster oO 1 Stored speed 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly If the display mph or km h appears briefly conditions may not be adequate to op erate the system Call up Check Control messages refer to page 83 On
285. rning lamps 17 Tachometer 74 Current fuel consumption 74 Engine oil temperature 74 Display for gt Clock 73 gt External temperature 73 gt Indicator warning lamps 17 gt Cruise control 103 Display for gt Automatic transmission position 68 16 i nn ASN N 4 1 min x 1000 f TE tay ROS Wh Iil AA j wN gt Hill Descent Control 101 gt Computer 75 gt Date of next scheduled service and re maining distance to be driven 80 gt Odometer and trip odometer 73 gt Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor 96 gt Checking engine oil level 243 gt Settings and information 76 gt Check Control message present 82 Fuel gauge 74 Resetting the trip odometer 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Indicator warning lights The concept The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on and light up briefly Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lights Supplementary text messages You can call up additional information e g on the cause of a malfunction and on how to re spond via Check Control refer to page 82 In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on Indicator li
286. roller Time zone UTC 01 00 Time 09 30 Format 24h Date 27 05 2012 Format tt mm jjjj 6 Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller 7 Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right Time Current entertainment source Sound output on off Wireless network reception strength Telephone status VV VV VV Traffic bulletin reception Status field symbols The symbols are grouped into various catego ries Symbol Meaning H HD Radio is switched on Satellite radio is switched on 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive Telephone symbols Incoming or outgoing call je Missed call lll Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes searching for network aill Wireless network is not available DA Text message e mail was received G9 Check the SIM card m SIM card is blocked V2 SIM card is missing a Enter the PIN Entertainment symbols amp CD DVD player A Music collection Soe Gracenote database x AUX IN port P USB audio interface Music interface for smartphones Additional symbols sal Spoken instructions are switched off E gt Request of the current vehicle posi tion 24 Split screen General information
287. rom the system are issued in an abbreviated form On the Control Display Settings Language Units Speech mode wy S Select the setting Default Short Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request In stressful situa tions the voice and vocal pitch can change This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection Instead use the SOS button refer to page 257 in the vicinity of the interior mirror Environmental conditions gt Say the commands numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system gt Keep the doors windows and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle All features an
288. s Halogen bulbs are pressurized There fore wear protective goggles and gloves Oth erwise there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement lt The low beams and high beams have separate covers 251 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Replacing components H7 bulb 55 watt 3 Pull out the bulb socket see arrow k A O eN a O Reattach the cover Low beam attach the folding cover in the Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock Low beam open the folding cover in the wheel arch refer to page 251 Remove the corresponding cover refer to page 251 Unplug the connector from the bulb Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the anchor arrow 1 and fold down arrow 2 4 Pull off the bulb and replace it 5 Insert the bulb socket 6 Reattach the cover Xenon headlights Xenon headlights At a glance Remove the bulb Insert the new bulb Fold up the wire bracket and lock it Mount the connector wheel arch 1 Parking lights daytime running lights Parking and roadside parking lights 5 watt bulb W5W 1 2 Low beams high beams headlight flasher 3 Turn signal Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock Because of the long life of these bulbs the likelihood of failure is very low Switching the PAO E MEEA CANTEC lights o
289. s another destination Add refer to page 153 a destination as a further destination Address book Create contacts refer to page 218 Selecting a destination from the address book 1 Navigation 2 Address book Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations in the contacts If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed they first need to be checked as destinations refer to page 219 EER EMELE Enter address v Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Map Stored trips Route information 3 Select a contact in the list or if desired with A Z search 4 Business address or Home address 148 Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination store the desti nation in the address book Navigation Map Guidance Open Options a lS Store as new contact or Add to existing contact IIG Options FY Split screen Switch off control display Enter address Store as new contact Add to existing contact BMW Assist destination entry Navigation Select an existing contact if available 7 Business address or Home address Enter Last name and if necessary First name 9 Store in vehicle Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Store position as contact or Add p
290. s critical for the life of the engine Due to national regulations some oil types are not available in every country Approved oil types Gasoline engine BMW High Performance SAE 5W 30 BMW Longlife 01 BMW Longlife 01 FE Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available up to 1 US quart liter of an oil with the following specification can be used 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Engine compartment pressure to escape then continue turning to open Gasoline engine API SM or a higher quality standard Oil change The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by a service center BMW recommends Original BMW Engine Oil Coolant General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot otherwise escaping coolant may cause burns Suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise engine damage may occur The additives are harmful to your health lt Coolant consists of water and additives Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle Ask your service cen ter for suitable additives Checking the coolant level 1 Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down 2 Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock wise slightly to allow any
291. s restrained by the internal harnesses Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest otherwise the degree of protection offered may be reduced lt JO Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Transporting children safely The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the indicated cover caps Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1 Mount the child restraint fixing system re fer to the operating instructions of the sys tem 2 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounting points There are three mounting points see arrows for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 56 LATCH mounting points Only use the mounting points for the up per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re straint systems otherwise the mounting points could be damaged lt Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the
292. sa com bluetooth Suitable mobile phones refer to page 198 The device is not supported by the vehicle gt Perform a software update refer to page 193 if needed The device could not be paired or connected gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive gt Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat the pairing proce dure gt Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the device or vehicle Delete connections with other devices if neces Sary gt Is the mobile phone in power save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life Charge the mobile phone in the snap in adapter or via a charging cable gt Depending on the mobile phone it is pos sible that only one device can be con nected to the vehicle Unpair the con nected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device gt The device no longer reacts Switch the device off and on again gt Repeat the pairing procedure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment Music cannot be played back gt Start the program for playing back music data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary gt Switch the radio on and off again Music files can only be played back softly gt Adjust the volume settings on the device Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or
293. screen 24 Split screen map set tings 159 Spoken instructions naviga tion 157 Sport program automatic transmission with Step tronic 68 71 Spray nozzles refer to Clean ing the windshield and head lamps 66 Spray nozzles refer to Wind shield washer nozzles 66 Stability control systems 99 Start Stop button 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Start Stop button starting the engine 60 Start Stop button switching off the engine 61 Starting the engine 60 Start problems refer to Jump starting 258 State province selecting for navigation 146 Stations stored 174 Station storing 168 Status information iDrive 23 Status of Owner s Manual 6 Steam jets 263 Steering wheel 53 Steering wheel adjusting 53 Steering wheel lock 59 Steering wheel shift pad dles 69 Steptronic refer to Automatic transmission with Step tronic 67 Steptronic refer to Sport pro gram and manual mode M S71 Stopping engine 61 Storage compartment nets 127 Storage compartments 125 Storage tires 241 Storing the vehicle 266 Street entering for naviga tion 147 Summer tires refer to Wheels and tires 232 Summer tires tread 238 Sun visor 119 Switches refer to Cockpit 14 Switching off engine 61 Switching off vehicle 61 Switch on times parked car ventilation 114 Symbols 6 Tachometer 74 Tailgate 38 Tailgate Comfort Access 40 Tailgat
294. shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time the transmission switches back to automatic mode D With the transmission position M S selected the manual mode remains active gt Shift up pull right shift paddle gt Shift down pull left shift paddle The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds e g it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the current gear 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is displayed and the engaged gear such as M4 is displayed in manual mode 72 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls Displays Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Odometer external temperature display clock 60 200 TS 745 11 15 am 481 mis 032050 123 8 mis 1 Knob in the instrument cluster
295. single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model For example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body con tact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa only use wheels with TPM electronics otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect a flat tire refer to page 95 Your service center will be glad to advise you 240 Recommended tire brands For each tire size the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall With proper use these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de sign and age of the tire casing structures can lim
296. sion Control System Lim ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region In such case please contact Customer Relations for further information Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Specifications for required maintenance meas ures gt BMW Maintenance system gt Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models gt Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications this could result in seri 8 ous damage to the vehicle Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty Data memory Numerous electronic components in
297. sories in the range of movement of the windows otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired Closing without the pinch protection system For example if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally proceed as follows 1 Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force ex ceeds a certain value 2 Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx 4 seconds and hold it there The window closes without pinch protec tion Safety switch With the safety switch the rear windows are prevented from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area such as by children Press the button The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport ing children in the rear otherwise injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision lt Panoramic glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the switch Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear otherwise injuries may result Take the remote contr
298. sporting children safely 59 Driving 73 Displays 85 Lamps 90 Safety 99 Driving stability control systems 103 Driving comfort 110 Climate 115 Interior equipment 125 Storage compartments Driving tips 132 Things to remember when driving 136 Loading 139 Saving fuel Navigation 144 Navigation system 146 Destination entry 155 Destination guidance 163 What to do if Entertainment 166 Tone 168 Radio 176 CD multimedia Communication 198 Telephone 209 Office 218 Contacts 221 ConnectedDrive Mobility 228 Refueling 230 Fuel 232 Wheels and tires 242 Engine compartment 247 Maintenance 249 Replacing components 257 Breakdown assistance 263 Care Reference 270 Technical data 272 Short commands for voice activation system 280 Everything from A to Z Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 dt Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter Additional sources of information Should you have any questions your service center will be glad to advise you at any time Information on BMW e g on technology is available on the Internet www bmwusa com BMW Driver s Guide App The Owner s Manual is available in many coun tries as an app Additional information on the Internet www bmw com bmw_drivers_guide Symbols FN Indicates precauti
299. ss the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Signal tones When approaching an object an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object For example if an object is de tected behind the vehicle a signal tone sounds from the rear speakers The shorter the distance to the object be comes the shorter the intervals If the distance to a detected object is less than approx 12 in 30 cm a continuous tone is sounded If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap prox 3 seconds 106 gt If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen sors gt If moving parallel to a wall The signal tone is switched off gt When the vehicle moves away from an ob ject by more than approx 4 in 10 cm gt When transmission position P is engaged Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone refer to page 167 The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Visual warning The approach to an object can be shown on the Control Display Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display be fore a signal tone sounds The display appears as soon as PDC is acti vated If the last image selected was the rearview camera this is displayed again To switch to PDC Rav
300. st name S First name gl Home E Business E Mobile 5 Enter the text refer to page 25 In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys tem it is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the vehicle navigation data This ensures that destination guid ance is possible for all addresses 6 If necessary Store 7 Store contact in vehicle Specifying the home address A home address can be stored It appears at the top of the contact list 1 Home 2 Create acontact 3 Store contact in vehicle My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle Displaying contacts 1 Contacts Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Contacts Communication 2 My contacts G Contacts New contact v My contacts All contacts are listed in alphabetical order Depending on the number of contacts an A Z search is offered refer to page 25 A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts No sym Inthe vehicle the address has not bol been checked as a destination a In the vehicle the address has been checked as a destination Of Mobile phone Dialing a phone number 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the phone number The connection is established Editing a contact 1 Select the desired contact 2 Edit contact contact A Edit contact MUSTERMANN M NCHEN M NCHEN STA a PETUELRING 130 DEUTSC
301. stem must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct other wise reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance lt A natural even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected Therefore check the tire inflation pressure regularly The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations gt When the system has not been initialized gt When driving ona snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style slip in the drive wheels high lateral acceleration gt When driving with snow chains Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display e g whether or not the FTM is active 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Flat Tire Monitor The status is displayed Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Safety Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains Vehicle Info Vehicle status 1 Reset Start
302. t Handling fuels Follow the safety instructions provided at gas stations otherwise there is a danger of personal injury and property damage lt 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Mobility Fuel Fuel Fuel recommendation Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Gasoline For the best fuel economy the gasoline should be sulfur free or very low in sulfur content Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump as containing metals Only refuel with lead free gasoline with out metal additives Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives e g manganese or iron otherwise the catalytic converter and other components will be permanently damaged Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 i e E10 may be used for refueling The ethanol should fulfill the following quality standards US ASTM 4806 xx CAN CGSB 3 511 xx xx always adhere to the currently applicable standard Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85 i e fuel with an ethanol co
303. t 254 Brake lights adaptive 98 Brake pads breaking in 132 Brake refer to Parking brake 63 Brakes BMW maintenance system 247 Brakes service require ments 80 Brake system BMW mainte nance system 247 Braking notes 133 Braking parking brake 63 Breakdown assistance refer to Roadside Assistance 221 Breakdown transporting the vehicle 260 Breaking in 132 Brightness on the Control Display 80 Bulb replacement refer to Lamp and bulb replace ment 250 Button for starting the engine refer to Start Stop but ton 59 C Calendar 214 California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera care 266 Camera refer to Backup cam era 107 Can holder refer to Cu pholder 127 Car battery refer to Vehicle battery 255 Car care products 264 Care 263 Care displays 266 Care vehicle 264 Cargo 136 Cargo area 120 Cargo area capacities 270 Cargo area Comfort Ac cess 40 Cargo area cover 120 Cargo area enlarging 121 Cargo area folding up the cargo floor panel 123 Cargo area lid refer to Tail gate 38 Cargo area light refer to Inte rior lights 89 Cargo area multi function hook 124 Cargo area opening from the inside 38 Cargo area opening from the outside 38 Cargo area partition net 121 281 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Cargo floor panel folding up 123 Cargo floor panel raising 123 Cargo net refer to Partition net 121
304. t perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlamps that text should be dis regarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Xenon headlamp work or replacement can cause serious and fatal Injuries In the text that follows where it reads h ave any work on the xenon light ing system the following words should be read as preceding that passage It is strongly suggested that you At page 255 under the Battery replace ment section the text should be disre garded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available After a battery replacement the manufac turer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all com fort functions are fully available and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 280 6 Notes Ata glance 14 Cockpit 20 iDrive 27 Voice activation system Controls 32 Opening and closing 46 Adjusting 54 Tran
305. tact with one stored phone number Cl Contact with more than one stored phone number X Call not possible mobile phone without reception or network or Service Request is active For contacts with one stored phone number select the required contact The connection is being established For contacts with more than one stored phone number select the required contact and the phone number The connection is being estab lished Editing a contact Changing the entries in Contacts When a contact is changed the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle 1 Highlight the contact 2 Open Options 3 Edit entry The contact can be edited Redialing General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone Dialing a number via the instrument cluster This is possible if a call is not currently active iF Press the button on the steering wheel 2 Select the desired phone number The connection is established Dialing the number via the iDrive 1 Telephone 2 Redial y Telephone Active calls Phone book v Redial Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth ph
306. target speed 2 HDC display Malfunction If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera tion or is not displayed HDC is not available due to high brake temperatures or DSC has failed 102 Drive off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents The parking brake is not required 1 Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake 2 Release the foot brake and drive away without delay Depending on the vehicle load the vehicle may roll back slightly Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake start driv ing without delay since the drive off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back lt Servotronic The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force re quired to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving Power steering provides strong support at low speeds which means that less effort is needed to turn the wheels Power steering support lessens as your speed increases Malfunction A The warning lamp lights up A mes sage appears on the Control Display Servotronic is malfunctioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Driving comfort Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for th
307. ted directory are played in random order Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off Fast forward reverse gt Press and hold the button Video playback Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back also refer to the informa tion on the DVD 1 USA Canada 2 Japan Europe Middle East South Af rica 3 Southeast Asia 4 Australia Central and South America New Zealand 5 Northwest Asia North Africa 6 China 0 All regions 178 Playback The video image is displayed on the Control Display up to a speed of approx 2 mph 3 km h in some countries it is only displayed while the parking brake is set or the automatic transmis sion is in position P DVD video 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select a DVD with video content 4 BVD DVD menu maj aio 5 Start the DVD via the DVD menu Video menu To open the video menu turn the controller during playback Press the controller when Back is displayed DvO Open DVD menu gt Starting playback Pause L Stop gt Next chapter KI Previous chapter D Fast forward K4 Reverse Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment In fast forward reverse the speed increases every time the controller is pressed To stop start playback DVD menu 1 If necessary turn the controller to open the video menu
308. ted uses an alternating code system Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror If the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds the system is equipped with an alternating code system This flashing LED pattern re peats itself for approx 20 seconds 116 In systems with an alternating code system the universal garage door opener and the sys tem must be additionally synchronized Please obtain additional information on syn chronization in the operating instructions of the system being set up The systems will be easier to synchronize with the aid of a second person Synchronization 1 Park the vehicle within range of the re mote controlled system 2 Program the corresponding button on the interior rearview mirror as described 3 Identify and press the synchronization but ton on the system being set up You have approx 30 seconds for the next step 4 Press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror for approx 3 seconds and then release it Repeat this step up to three times if necessary to complete the syn chronization procedure When synchroni zation is completed the programmed func tion is executed Reprogramming individual buttons 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Hold the hand held transmitter at a dis tance of approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm from the m
309. tem note the instructions refer to page 54 Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back rests ensure that path of movement of the backrests is clear Especially when the middle section is folded down ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the path of move ment of the rear seat backrests Otherwise in juries or damage may result Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt refer to page 48 Otherwise personal pro tection may be compromised lt Adjusting the outer backrests a Da 1 Reach into the recess and pull the lever to ward the front 2 Engage the backrest in the desired posi tion or fold it down On the left side the outer and center backrests are adjusted jointly toward the front if both backrests are engaged in the same lock in po sition The backrests can be adjusted separately to ward the rear Note that the center backrest cannot be tilted farther down than the left backrest Adjusting only the center backrest 1 Pull the loop arrow 2 Engage the backrest in the desired posi tion or fold it down Folding the backrests back up When the backrests are folded back up they engage in the transport position To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort po sition pull the lever of the left right backrest or the loop of the center backrest forward Locking the backrest Before lettin
310. tems and create the settings Control Display Notes gt To clean the Control Display follow the care instructions refer to page 266 gt Donot place objects close to the Control Display otherwise the Control Display can be damaged Switching off Press the button 2 Switch off control display Gy Options O Split screen Switch off control display Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 iDrive ESEE Controller Press the but Function Select menu items and create settings ton 1 Turn NAV Opens the Navigation menu TEL Opens the Telephone menu BACK Displays the previous panel OPTION Opens the Options menu Operating concept Press Opening the main menu MENU Press the button 1 o Main menu CD Multimedia Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info 3 Move in four directions Settings The main menu is displayed All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected 1 Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted Main menu CD Multimedia Press the but Function Radio ton Telephone l ma Navigation MENU Opens the main menu Office RADIO Opens the Radio menu ean EELE Vehicle Info MEDIA Opens the CD Multimedia Settings menu 2 Press the controll
311. th bile ph note the operating instructions of the mobile i S ll aie phone 1 Depending on the mobile phone remove the protective cap from the antenna con Installation position nector and from the USB connection of the In the center armrest mobile phone 2 With the buttons facing up slide the mo Inserting removing the snap in bile phone up toward the electrical con adapter tacts and press it down until it engages 1 Press button 1 and remove the cover The battery is charged beginning with the l radio ready state of the vehicle 2 Insert the snap in adapter at the front ar row 1 and press down arrow 2 until it en gages 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Telephone Removing the mobile phone VYWDO962Z0AW Press the button and remove the mobile phone 208 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Office Communication Office Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Ata glance General information Contacts appointments tasks notes te
312. th passkey Enter the passkey and confirm Enter same passkey for vehicle and Bluetooth p phone Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment 8 Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected for instance Audio O OK 7 Bluetooth function Functions of the device EY Telephone LY Audio If pairing was successful the device is dis played as connected White symbol JJ the device is active as an audio source If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 192 Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth Requirements If necessary activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces CD Multimedia Bluetooth audio If necessary Bluetooth audio p o a Select the desired device from the list of paired devices Open Options Configure phone Activate Audio OK O N o Connecting the device 1 CD Multimedia 2 Bluetooth audio 3 If necessary Bluetooth audio 4 Select the desired device from the list of paired devices 1 amp Bluetooth audio Add new phone Connected Handy 1 Paired Gerat 1 White symbol JJ the device is active as an audio source
313. the Control Display the tires are shown in green and TPM active is dis played again The trip can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes the reset is continued auto matically If a flat tire is detected while the system is re setting all tires on the Control Display are dis played in yellow The message Low tire is shown Low tire pressure message The small warning light lights up yel _ low and the large warning light lights ownee Up red A message appears on the Control Display In addition a signal sounds gt There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in flation pressure gt The system was not reset The system therefore issues warnings in case of devia tions from the tire inflation pressures stored last 96 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt When a flat tire is indicated DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary Actions in the event of a flat tire Run flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km
314. the door lock 36 Opening and closing using the remote control 34 Operating concept iDrive 20 Outside air mode automatic climate control 112 Outside air refer to Recircu lated air mode 112 Overheating of engine refer to Coolant temperature 74 P Paint vehicle 264 Pairing mobile phone 199 Panic mode 35 Panoramic glass sunroof 44 Panoramic glass sunroof convenient operation 34 Panoramic glass sunroof ini tializing 45 Panoramic glass sunroof opening closing 44 Panoramic glass sunroof pinch protection 45 Panoramic glass sunroof power failure 45 Panoramic glass sunroof re mote control 34 Panoramic glass sunroof tilt ing 44 Park Distance Control PDC 105 Parked car ventilation 113 Parked vehicle condensa tion 134 Parking aid refer to Park Dis tance Control PDC 105 Parking assistant refer to Park Distance Control PDC 105 Parking brake 63 Parking lamps 85 Parking lamps low beams 85 Parking lights bulb replace ment 252 Partition net 121 Passenger side mirror tilt ing 51 PDC Park Distance Con trol 105 Performance Control 101 Personal information 209 Personal Profile 32 Pinch protection panoramic glass sunroof 45 Pinch protection win dows 43 Plastic care 265 Pollen refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 113 Poor road operation 134 Position storing 148 Postal code entering in navi gation 147 Power failure 256
315. the engine do not drive away Start the initialization with Reset aS eh Drive away The initialization is completed while driving which can be interrupted at any time The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes Indication of a flat tire _ The warning lamp lights up red A message appears on the Control Dis play In addition a signal sounds There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt When a flat tire is indicated DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary Actions in the event of a flat tire Run flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h 94 Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h At the next opportunity check the inflation pressure in all four tires oo If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure
316. the front pas senger side too far to the rear during driving Otherwise there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident This would elimi 46 nate the protection normally provided by the belt lt Adjusting manually Forward backward Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position After releasing the lever move the seat for ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off as necessary Backrest tilt Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back rest or lift it off as necessary Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Adjusting Controls Seat tilt Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off as necessary Thigh support Pull the lever and move the thigh support for ward or back Adjusting electrically camel es Azt 1 Forward backward 2 Height 3 Seat tilt 4 Backrest The head restraint can be adjusted manually refer Head restraints below Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar re gion The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a re laxed upright sitting position gt Increase or decrease curvature Press front or rear section of switch gt Shift curvature up or down Press upper or lower section of s
317. the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process Tracks from the current CD DVD that have already been stored can be called up Interrupting storage 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 182 3 Storing GF CD DVD Storing amp Best of Brothers in arms amp Mezzanine G Audio CD lela 4 Cancel storing The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time Continuing the storage process 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 amp Select the symbol for the CD DVD player 4 Continue storing Storage of the CD DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted Album information During storage information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track if this infor mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD To update the database contact your service center Storing from a USB device To store music a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment gt Suitable devices USB mass storage devi ces such as USB flash drives or MP3 play ers with a USB interface gt Unsuitable devices USB hard drives USB hubs USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts Apple iPod iPhone Music from the Apple iPod iPhone can be played Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 CD multimedia Entertainment via the USB audio interface in the center
318. the programmable mem ory buttons refer to page 24 Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels you must have reception It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky The channel name is displayed in the status line Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 nanneils The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Ke me Category Satellite radio xa 8 Snow Patrol amp Category Chasing Cars ce he All channels YF 001 Sirius Hits 1 42 002 Starlite 003 Sirius Love 004 Movin EZ 4 Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory 5 Select the desired channel The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Select the phone number to have the channel enabled tS Subscribe to Sirius Call Sirius to subscribe ESN 020 373 371 411 Sy 1 888 539 SIRIUS You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number Unsubscribing from channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Open Options 4 Manage subscription Y yt 4S Options LY Split screen Switch off control display Satellite radio Manage subscription Set jump 5 The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels Selecting channels You can only l
319. the rearview camera is under the grasping lip of the tailgate The presence of dirt can impair image quality Clean the lens with a moist nonabrasive cloth 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Climate Climate Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected Automatic climate control special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Manual air distribution Maximum cooling Temperature left AUTO program Manual air flow rate AUTO intensity Display NO oO fh WN Automatic recirculated air control recircu lated air mode 8 ALL program 110 9 Temperature right 10 Defrosting windows and removing conden sation 11 Switching cooling function on off manually 12 Rear window defroster 13 Seat heating right 48 14 Interior temperature sensor please keep clear 15 Seat heating left 48 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Climate Controls Note Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex tended period of time ensure sufficient exter nal ventilation Do not continuously use recir culated air
320. the vents for the upper body region Open them for this purpose Air is cooled as quickly as possible gt At an external temperature of approx 32 F 0 C gt When the engine is running AUTO program AUTO Press the button Air volume air distribution and tem perature are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature AUTO intensity and outside influences the air is directed to the windshield side windows upper body and into the footwell The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program At the same time a condensation sensor con trols the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possi ble To switch off the program press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on auto matic control of the air volume and air distribu tion can be adjusted 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Climate P Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase the inten OFF Eg sity The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Air volume manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume switch off the AUTO program first E Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase air volume The selected air volume is shown on the dis play of t
321. therwise the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able Seat and mirror memory General information f Two different driver s seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored and retrieved gt To raise pull The adjustment of the backrest width and the gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and lumbar support is not stored in the memory push the head restraint down Storing Rear Height adjustment 1 Switch on the radio ready state or the igni tion refer to page 59 2 Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the gt To raise pull desired positions gt To lower press button arrow 1 and push headrest down 3 Press the button The LED in the button lights up The height of the middle head restraint cannot 4 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 be adjusted The LED goes out Removing at the front and rear If the M button is pressed accidentally Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Press the button again The LED goes sitting in the seat in question out 1 Pull upward as far as possible 2 Press the button arrow 1 and completely pull out the head restraint with the rear seat backrest folded forward slightly 50 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Adjusting Controls Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv ing aS an unexpected seat
322. time telephone and en tertainment details gt Lower status field symbol for active desti nation guidance status of traffic bulletins time of arrival and distance to destination Function bar The following functions are available in the function bar Symbol Function wy Start end destination guidance ry Switch spoken instructions on off wo J s Change the route criteria anh Search for a special destina tion A Display traffic bulletins Open the interactive map M AN Set the map view oO Change the scale To change to the function bar move the con troller to the left Changing the map section Interactive map gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt To shift the map diagonally move the con troller in the required direction and turn it Changing the scale 1 Select the symbol 2 Tochange the scale turn the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north turn the control ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played The entire route between the current location and the destination is displayed on the map Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Navigation Map Open Options Settings To set the map view vaa WN gt Day night mode Select an
323. tination refer to page 153 gt Exit interactive map return to the map view gt View in northern direction or View in driving direction gt Display destination the map section around the destination is displayed gt Display current location the map section around your current location is displayed gt Find points of interest the search for Points of Interest is started 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination entry Destination entry by voice General information gt Instructions for voice activation system re fer to page 27 gt When making a destination entry by voice you can change between voice operation and iDrive gt To have the available spoken instructions read out loud Voice commands Saying the entries gt The town city street and house number can be entered using a single command gt Countries towns and cities streets and intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system refer to page 79 Example to enter a destination ina US state as a whole word the system lan guage must be English gt Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ gt Say the letters smoothly and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters gt The methods of entry depend on the navi gation data in use and the country and
324. tion 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Pathway light s GF Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal a O Daytime running lamps Fe 4 O Welcome light 4 Set the duration The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Automatic headlamp control Switch position 2 the low beams are switched on and off automatically e g in tun nels in twilight or if there is precipitation The LED next to the symbol lights up A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on The low beams remain switched on independ ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the front fog lamps Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a Substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions 86 For example the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in posi tion 0 D Q and 0 After the ignition is switched off the parking lamps light up in po sition DQE Activating deactivating In some countries driving with daytime run ning lights is mandatory for this reason day time running lights cannot be deactivated in these cases 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Daytime r
325. tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center lt Message when the system was not reset re j TY The yellow warning light lights up A e Check Control message is displayed The system may not have been reset although a wheel was changed L Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system refer to page 96 System limits The system does not function properly if it has not been reset e g it may identify a tire as flat in spite of the fact that the tire is filled to the correct inflation pressure The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire An increase in the tire temperature e g while driving or due to sunlight increases the tire inflation pressure The tire pressure decreases when the tire temperature drops In case of severe temperature drops this behav ior may lead to a warning on account of the de fined warning limits Malfunction O o The small warning light flashes in yel 1 low and then lights up continuously mace the larger warning light comes on in yellow On the Control Display the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears No flat tire can be detected Display in the following situations gt A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted have
326. to the vehicle Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed 1 Office 2 Current office 3 Select the desired entry to display details Wa Current office Unread messages M2 N 1 Active tasks 3 09 00 Team Meeting 10 30 Office 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Communication Office Contacts Note Equipment version with the mobile phone preparation package At a glance Contacts can be created and edited The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed Displaying contacts General information 1 Office 2 Contacts EF Office Current office Contacts Messages Calendar Tasks Notes Reminders All contacts are listed in alphabetical order Depending on the number of contacts an A Z search is offered refer to page 25 A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts No sym Inthe vehicle the address has not bol been checked as a destination a In the vehicle the address has been checked as a destination ro Mobile phone 210 Dialing phone numbers 1 Select the desired contact 2 Select the phone number The connection is established Editing a contact 1 Select the desired contact
327. to Cargo area enlarg ing 121 Divided screen view split screen 24 Door key refer to Remote control with integrated key 32 Door lock 36 Doors manual operation 37 Doors unlocking and locking confirmation signals 35 Doors unlocking and locking from the inside 37 Doors unlocking and locking from the outside 34 DOT Quality Grades 238 Downhill control 101 Draft free ventilation 113 Drive off assistant 102 Driving away on inclines refer to Drive off assistant 102 Driving notes breaking in 132 Driving notes general 132 Driving on poor roads 134 Driving stability control sys tems 99 Driving through water 133 Driving tips refer to Driving notes 132 Dry air refer to Cooling func tion 112 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol 99 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 100 DTMF suffix dialing 204 DVD CD 176 DVDs storing 181 DVD video 178 Dynamic destination guid ance 162 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 99 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 100 E ECO PRO 140 ECO PRO display 140 ECO PRO driving mode 140 ECO PRO mode 140 EfficientDynamics refer to Saving fuel 139 Electrical malfunction door lock 37 Electrical malfunction driver s door 37 Electrical malfunction fuel filler flap 229 Electrical malfunction tail gate 38 Electric seat adjustment 47 Electronic brake force distri bution 99 Electronic engine oil level check 243 Electronic Stability Program ESP refer to Dynamic Sta bil
328. to the en tertainment sound output gt Microphone volume of the microphone during a phone call gt Loudspeak volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone Microphone Loudspeak Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Volume settings 4 Select the desired volume setting G Volume settings Gong Telephone Setting possible only during a call Microphone mim Loudspeak 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Resetting the tone settings All tone settings can be reset to the default setting 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Reset 167 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment _ Radio Radio Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations Controls Volume on off Change wave band Change entertainment sources Change station track a fF OO N Programmable memory buttons Sound ou
329. tput Switching on off When the ignition is switched off press ON OFF button on the radio 168 Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running press the ON OFF button on the radio AM FM station Selecting a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Select the desired station OQ Manual 93 1 94 7 WFME 95 5 by PAT J v 96 3 Musica 97 1 and R amp B 97 9 All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use Changing the station Turn the controller and press it or gt Press the button or Press the buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 14 Storing a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Entertainment 3 Highlight the desired station T A Manual 93 1 94 7 WFME 95 5 by PAT v 96 3 Musica 97 1 and R amp B 97 9 4 Press the controller for an extended period 5 Select the desired memory location The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 24 Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Manual 4 To select the frequency turn the control ler n FM manual 96 7 400 To store the station press the controller for an extended period Renaming a station An FM station with changing station names can be rena
330. trol refer to page 247 Integrated key Press button 1 and pull out the key The integrated key fits the following locks gt Driver s door refer to page 36 New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle s functions to suit your personal needs and preferences Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Opening and closing Controls gt The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated in the remote control gt The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up gt Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control The individual settings are stored for a maxi mum of four remote controls They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile More information on the settings can be found under gt Assigning the programmable memory but tons refer to page 24 gt Response of the central locking system when the car is being unlocked refer to page 34 gt Automatic locking of the vehicle refer to page 37
331. ts and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision Media protected by this product unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision may only be used for private purposes Copy ing of this technology is prohibited DTS Digital Surround dts e Manufactured under license under U S Patent Numbers 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 amp and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide DTS and the logo are registered trademarks amp DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc DTS Inc All rights reserved Music collection Storing music General information Music tracks from CDs DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there gt Audio CD tracks are converted into a com pressed audio format If available informa tion on the album such as the artist is stored as well gt CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files the entire content of the CD DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album The WMA MP3 M4A and AAC formats are stored Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later Deleting a track and directory refer to page 185 Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data oth
332. ts 89 For your own safety 7 Four wheel drive refer to xDrive 101 Front airbags 90 Front fog lights 88 Front passenger airbags de activating 91 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 93 Fuel 230 Fuel additives 230 Fuel average consump tion 75 Fuel cap 228 Fuel cap closing 228 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Fuel consumption display average fuel consump tion 75 Fuel consumption display current fuel consump tion 74 Fuel efficient driving refer to Current fuel consump tion 74 Fuel filler flap 228 Fuel filler flap closing 228 Fuel filler flap opening 228 Fuel filler flap unlocking in case of an electrical mal function 229 Fuel gauge 74 Fuel refer to Average fuel consumption 75 Fuel saving 139 Fuel tank capacity refer to Filling capacities 271 Fuel tank contents refer to Filling capacities 271 Fuel tank refer to Filling ca pacities 271 Fuse 256 G Garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 115 Gasoline 230 Gasoline gauge refer to Fuel gauge 4 Gas station recommenda tion 157 Gear change automatic transmission with Step tronic 68 71 Gear change via shift pad dles 71 Gear display automatic trans mission with Steptronic 67 General driving notes 132 Glare protection 119 Glass sunroof electric opera tion 34 Glass sunroof refer to Panor amic glass sunroof 44 Glove compartment 125
333. ttended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside lt 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Tailgate gt J Press the remote control button for ap prox 1 second and then release Opening The tailgate opens slightly It can be swung The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens upward Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening Opening manually Provide edge protection In case of an electrical malfunction Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear 1 Fold down the rear seat backrest enlarge window while driving and damage the heating the cargo area refer to page 121 wires of the rear window Provide edge protec 2 From the cargo area press out the handle tion lt in the tailgate see arrow and pull out as far as possible The tailgate is unlocked Opening from the inside 3 Open the tailgate from the outside and Press the button press in the handle The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is stationary provided that the tailgate has not closed been locked In some market specific versions this button Closing does not exist Opening from the outside Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
334. ture 74 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Cooling function switching on and off 112 Cooling maximum 111 Cooling system refer to Cool ant 246 Corrosion on brake discs 134 Courtesy lights refer to Inte rior lights 89 Cradle for telephone or mo bile phone refer to Snap in adapter 207 Cruise control 103 Cruise control malfunc tion 105 Cupholder 127 Curb weight refer to Weights 270 Current fuel consumption 74 Current location storing 148 Curve lights refer to Adaptive Light Control 86 D Dashboard lighting refer to Instrument lighting 89 Dashboard refer to Cock pit 14 Data technical 270 Date date format 79 Date setting 78 Daytime running lights 86 Daytime running lights bulb replacement 253 Defroster rear window 113 Destination entry via the ad dress book 148 Destination guidance 155 Destination guidance with in termediate destinations 153 Destination input naviga tion 146 Digital clock 73 Digital compass 117 Digital radio 169 Dimming mirrors 52 Directional indicators refer to Turn signals 64 Display lighting refer to In strument lighting 89 Displays and controls 14 Displays care 266 Displays cleaning 266 Displays refer to Instrument cluster 16 Disposal coolant 246 Disposal vehicle battery 256 Distance warning refer to Park Distance Control PDC 105 Divided rear seat backrest re fer
335. uart Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart 1 li ter of engine oil at the next opportunity re fer also to Adding engine oil below gt Engine oil level too high Have this checked Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi ately otherwise surplus oil can lead to en gine damage lt gt Measurement inactive Have this checked Do not add engine oil It is possi ble to continue driving Note the newly cal culated remaining mileage until the next oil service refer to page 80 Have the system checked as soon as possible Adding engine oil Filler neck Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart 1 liter of oil only after a corresponding message ap pears on the Control Display Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km otherwise engine damage could result lt Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately otherwise surplus oil can lead to engine dam age lt Protect children Keep oil grease etc out of reach of chil dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks Oil types for refilling Notes No oil additives Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage lt Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis cosity classes OW 40 OW 30 5W 40 or 5W 30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur lt The engine oil quality i
336. uid 67 Wood care 265 Word match concept naviga tion 25 Working in the engine com partment 243 Wrench screwdriver refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 249 X xDrive 101 Xenon headlights bulb re placement 252 293 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 More about BMW The Ultimate bmwusa com Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 01 40 2 954 052 ue
337. umption and gt Average speed Resetting the fuel consumption and speed Resetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption 1 Select the respective menu item and press the controller 2 Press the controller again to confirm your selection Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values 1 Vehicle Info 2 Trip computer 3 Reset Settings and information Operating concept Certain settings and information can only be called up when the ignition is switched on A number of settings cannot be made while driv ing 1 Button for gt Selecting the display gt Setting values 2 Button for Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls gt Confirming the selected display or set values gt Calling up computer information 75 Symbol Function Beeeoo0co0o BEA With the lights switched on Dimming instrument lighting refer to page 89 Calling up Check Control refer to page 82 gt CHECK CONTROL Checking the engine oil level refer to page 243 Setting the time refer to page Setting the date refer to page 78 08 04 2004 gt SET Viewing service requirement display refer to page 80 gt SERVICE INFO Exiting displays The external temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx 15 seconds If required complete the current setting first Units of meas
338. unning lamps F Lighting Pathway light Os Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps J O Welcome light The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road In sharp curves e g serpentines or during turning up to a certain speed one of the two Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Lamps Controls front fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve Controls Activating Switch position 2 with the ignition switched on The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er s side when the vehicle is at a standstill When driving in reverse both turning lamps are active Malfunction j ei The warning lamp lights up A mes tm f O Sage appears on the Control Display Adaptive Light Control is malfunc tioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible High beams roadside parking lights 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps Left
339. ure The units for fuel consumption route distance temperature and pressure can be changed 1 Settings 2 Language Units Time Date o Language Units J Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks 3 Select the desired menu item 4 Select the desired unit The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Clock Setting the time In the instrument cluster To set the 12h 24h format refer to Setting the time format below 1 Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display accompa nied by the time and the word SET 2 Press button 2 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Displays Use button 1 to set the hours Press button 2 to confirm the entry Use button 1 to set the minutes Press button 2 to confirm the entry Se oS e Press button 2 The system accepts the new time Via the iDrive MENU P Press the button The main menu is displayed Main menu CO Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings CD Multimedia Radio Telephone Mavigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings Setting the time zone 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Time zone 4 Select the desired time zone The time zone is stored Setting the time 1 Settings 2 Time Date 78 ma ee m cr Time
340. urn signal lever Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified They cannot be hidden If several malfunctions occur at once the mes sages are displayed consecutively They are marked with the symbol shown here Other Check Control messages are hidden au tomatically after approx 20 seconds However they are stored and can be displayed again later They are marked with the symbol shown here Viewing stored Check Control messages 1 Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the ap propriate symbol appears in the display accompanied by the words CHECK CON TROL b CHECK CONTROL 2 Press button 2 If there is no Check Control message this is indicated by CHECK OK If a Check Control message has been stored the cor responding lamp comes on It is accompa nied by a text message on the Control Dis play 3 Press button 1 to check for other mes sages 4 Press button 2 The display again shows the external tem perature and the time Displaying stored Check Control messages 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 A Check Control 4 Select the text message Messages after trip completion Special messages that were displayed during a trip are displayed again after the ignition is switched off Speed limit Entry of a speed limit which when reached should cause a Check Control message to be
341. usly Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real time traffic information If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply An End User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein A Total Traffic Network a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting Inc Total Traffic Network holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS TMC network through which it is delivered You may not modify copy scan or use any other method to reproduce duplicate republish transmit or distribute in any way any por 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 tion of traffic incident data You agree to in demnify defend and hold harmless BMW of North America LLC BMW NA and Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc and their affiliates against any and all claims dam ages costs or other expenses that arise di rectly or indirectly out of a your unauthor ized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS TMC network b your violation of this directive and or c any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith B Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only User assumes all risk of use Total Traffic Network BMW NA and their suppliers make no representations about content traffic and road condit
342. ut from the remote control by the service specialist For certain maintenance operations you can view the distance remaining or the due date for that operation in the instrument cluster 1 Switch on the ignition refer to page 60 2 Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the ap propriate symbol appears in the display accompanied by the words SERVICE INFO P SERVICE INFO 3 Press button 2 4 Use button 1 to scroll through the individ ual service items Displays Function Symbol Service requirements Engine oil 1212014 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls Roadworthiness test S o Far Front brake pads 10000 Rear brake pads mis 10000 The sequence of displayed service items may vary First the data for the next maintenance are displayed Brake fluid Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status Vehicle Info Onboard info v Trip computer Vehicle status ECO PRO Tips 3 Go Service required Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed Additional information can be displayed on each entry Select the entry and press the controller To exit from the menu Move the controller to the left
343. ut is insufficient If the engine braking ef fect is insufficient on downhill slopes the sys tem will brake the vehicle slightly Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached gt Each time the lever is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed increases by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point the desired speed is in creased by up to 5 mph 10 km h 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Driving comfort The system stores and maintains the speed Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly Press the lever to the resistance point arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached Accelerating significantly Press the lever beyond the resistance point arrow 1 until the desired speed is reached The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal The system stores and maintains the speed Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond arrow 2 until the desired speed is displayed gt Each time the lever is pulled to the resist ance point the desired speed is decreased by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point the desired speed is re duced by up to 5 mph 10 km h until the minimum speed of 20 mph 30 km h is ach ieved The system sto
344. utomatic transmission The engine can only be switched off with transmission position P engaged refer to page 61 To switch the engine off with transmission po sition N engaged insert the remote control in the ignition lock Malfunction The Comfort Access functions can be distur bed by local radio waves such as by a mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle 40 If this occurs open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock Mechanical activation using the integrated key only locks unlocks the driver s door To start the engine afterward insert the re mote control into the ignition switch Warning lights gi The warning light in the instrument j 7 cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine the engine cannot be started The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked If necessary Insert another remote control into the ignition switch A L The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running the remote control is no lon ger inside the vehicle After switching off the engine the engine can only be started again within approx 10 sec onds if no door has been opened fm _ The indicator lamp in the instrument j he cluster comes o
345. uttons Do not wear gloves or use objects The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen CD Multimedia Telephone Navigation ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings gt To display short information touch the button gt To display detailed information touch the button for an extended period Entering letters and numbers 1 Turn the controller select letters or num bers 2 Select additional letters or numbers if needed 3 OK confirm the entry e Press the controller delete the let ter or number e Press the controller for an extended period delete all letters or numbers L Enter a blank space Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers ABc Enter the letters 12 Enter the numbers Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering uppercase and lowercase let ters Move the controller forward switch from upper to lower case letters Move the controller forward switch from lower to upper case letters Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle 25 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Ataglance GELE U E i
346. void highways gt The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per sonal experience gt The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use gt Destination guidance with traffic bulletins refer to page 161 Changing the route criteria 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 tw st Route preference 4 Select the criterion gt t Fast route time optimized route being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads gt J ECO PRO route or Efficient route optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Navigation Destination guidance gt Short route short distance irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be gt Alternative routes if available alter native routes are suggested during ac tive destination guidance The individual suggestions are high lighted in color Ce Route Ce Route preference 7 Fast route ECO PRO route Short route as Alternative routes 10 24 10 27 5 Specify additional criteria for the route if necessary gt Avoid highways highways are avoided wherever possible gt Avoid toll roads toll roads are avoided wherever possible gt Avoid ferries ferries are avoided where possible Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance gt Arrow vie
347. w gt List of route sections gt Map view refer to page 157 Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance gt Large arrow indicates the current direction of travel gt Street name of the currently traveled street 156 gt Small arrow indicates the next change in direction Intersection view Lane information Traffic bulletins Distance to the next change in direction VV VV OV Street name at the next change in direc tion Lane information On multilane roads the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle gt Solid triangle best lane gt Empty triangle possible lane However another lane change may be needed shortly Displaying list of route sections When destination guidance is activated a list of route sections can be displayed The driving distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Highlight route section The route section is displayed on the split screen Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Destination guidance Navigation 3 New route for GE Route information f New route for 4 Turn the controller Enter the number of kilometers within which you would like to return to the original rout
348. w gt On the back of the mirror For proper operation gt Keep the photocells clean gt Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Adjusting Controls Steering wheel General information Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving otherwise an unexpected movement could result in an accident lt Adjusting 1 Fold the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi tion 3 Fold the lever back Do not use force to swing the lever back Do not use force to swing the lever back up otherwise the mechanism will be dam aged lt Steering wheel heating Switching on off EJ Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Transporting children safely Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country specific and special equipment offered for this model series Therefore it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version This also applies to safety related functions and systems When using the features and systems descri bed here adhere to local regulations The r
349. w beams welcome lamps a fF Q N Fog lights Parking lights low beams headlight control General information If the driver s door is opened while the ignition is switched off the exterior lighting is switched off automatically in the following switch set tings 0 20 20 Parking lamps Switch position Q the vehicle lamps light up on all sides e g for parking Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods otherwise the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine When parking it is preferable to switch on the one sided roadside parking lamps refer to page 87 Low beams Switch position ZD with the ignition switched on the low beams light up Welcome lights When parking the vehicle leave the switch in position ZD or 40 the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked Activating deactivating the welcome lamps 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Welcome light F Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal VEN O Daytime running lamps Ck rg GY Welcome light 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Lamps The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Headlight courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off if the lights are switched off and the headlight flasher is switched on Setting the dura
350. wise damage may result To access the tool kit for example lift the stor age compartment at the rear To lift reach into the recess on the rear edge of the storage compartment The storage compartment can be removed if necessary Raising the cargo floor panel Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left right and at the rear Fold the panel up and for ward pressing it into the gap between the cargo area floor and the rear seat backrest Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel when it is upright Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel when it is upright do not press up or down on it and do not adjust the rear seat backrests otherwise damage may result Before closing the tailgate fold down the cargo floor panel To do this pull the cargo floor panel toward the rear raising it up and out of the gap The cargo floor panel can be removed if nec essary 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Interior equipment Lashing eyes To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw straps lashing eyes are available in the cargo area refer to page 137 Multi function hooks _ A multi function hook is located on each side of the cargo area arrow Do not hang heavy items from the hooks Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders Otherwise there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva sive maneuvers Only transport heavy lu
351. witch 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Controls Adjusting Backrest width The width of the backrest can be changed with the side wings to adjust the side support to your own needs Press front or rear section of switch The backrest width decreases or increases Adjusting the rear seat backrests Adjusting the backrest tilt refer to page 121 Seat heating Switching on See Press the button once for each tem perature level The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit If the trip is continued within approx 15 mi nutes the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last Switching off Press the button longer 48 The LEDs go out The temperature is reduced if need be down to no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery The LEDs remain lit Safety belts General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection they are not a substitute for safety belts Seats with safety belt gt The shoulder strap s anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted gt The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right gt The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended
352. xt messages and e mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards Information about which mobile phones sup port Office functions can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth A limited num ber of compatible mobile phones is available for Office Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary The mobile phone has read access only Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occupants and to other road users never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this Requirements gt A suitable mobile phone is paired with the vehicle and connected In some mobile phones data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone gt The time time zone and date refer to page 77 are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone for in stance to correctly display appointments gt Office is activated refer to page 199 Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle Appointment en tries tasks notes and reminders can be up dated separately 1 Office 2 Current office Calendar Tasks Notes or Reminders 3 Open Options 4 Update data Mobile phone data are transmitted again
353. y low Hood is unlocked HDC is activated Stop and go traffic VV VV OV The selector lever is in position N or M S sy The indicator lamp is lit l TOP Parking the vehicle during an automatic engine stop The vehicle can be parked safely during an au tomatic engine stop such as when you wish to leave the vehicle 1 Press the Start Stop button The ignition is switched off The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated Automatic transmission transmission po sition P is engaged automatically 2 Set the parking brake Start the engine as usual using the Start Stop button Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive away gt Automatic transmission The brake pedal is released After the engine starts accelerate as usual 62 Safety mode The engine does not start by itself after it is switched off automatically if any of the follow ing conditions are fulfilled gt The driver s safety belt is unfastened or the driver s door is open gt Hood was unlocked j The indicator lamp lights up A mes A p Iig p or sage appears on the Control Display The engine can only be started via the Start Stop button Note Even if you do not wish to drive away the stop ped engine still starts automatically in the fol lowing situations gt The interior has heated up strongly with the cooling fun
354. your vehi cle contain data memories that store technical information on the vehicle condition events and faults either temporarily or permanently This technical information generally docu ments the state of a component a module a system or the environment gt Operating conditions of system compo nents such as filling levels gt Status messages from the vehicle and its individual components such as wheel rpm speed motion delay transverse accelera tion gt Malfunctions and defects in important sys tem components such as lights and brakes gt Vehicle responses to special driving situa tions such as airbag deployment use of the stability control systems gt Ambient conditions such as the tempera ture These data are of a technical nature only and are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions Travel profiles of routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre ated from these data If services are used for instance in the event of repairs service proc esses warranty cases quality assurance etc this technical information can be read out from the event and fault data memories by service personnel including the manufacturer using special diagnosis tools This service personnel can provide you with more information if needed After troubleshooting the information in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten continuously Situations are conceivable during the use of th
355. ys tems monitored A Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and in some circumstances an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display 82 Indicator warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on The symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored The Check Con trol messages can be displayed later Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps Supplementary text messages Additional information such as on the cause of a fault or the required action can be called up via Check Control In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 052 II 15 Displays Controls Symbols The following functions can be selected within the supplementary text message depending on the Check Control message gt Service request Contact the service partner gt Roadside Assistance Contact Roadside Assistance Hiding Check Control messages Press the computer button in the t

BMW X1 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents